<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
>smb.conf</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.57"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="REFENTRY"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
LINK="#0000FF"
VLINK="#840084"
ALINK="#0000FF"
><H1
><A
NAME="SMB.CONF"
>smb.conf</A
></H1
><DIV
CLASS="REFNAMEDIV"
><A
NAME="AEN5"
></A
><H2
>Name</H2
>smb.conf&nbsp;--&nbsp;The configuration file for the Samba suite</DIV
><DIV
CLASS="REFSECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN8"
></A
><H2
>SYNOPSIS</H2
><P
>The <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>smb.conf</TT
> file is a configuration 
	file for the Samba suite. <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>smb.conf</TT
> contains 
	runtime configuration information for the Samba programs. The
	<TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>smb.conf</TT
> file is designed to be configured and 
	administered by the <A
HREF="swat.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>swat(8)</B
>
	</A
> program. The complete description of the file format and 
	possible parameters held within are here for reference purposes.</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="REFSECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN16"
></A
><H2
>FILE FORMAT</H2
><P
>The file consists of sections and parameters. A section 
	begins with the name of the section in square brackets and continues 
	until the next section begins. Sections contain parameters of the 
	form</P
><P
><TT
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>name</I
></TT
> = <TT
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>value
	</I
></TT
></P
><P
>The file is line-based - that is, each newline-terminated 
	line represents either a comment, a section name or a parameter.</P
><P
>Section and parameter names are not case sensitive.</P
><P
>Only the first equals sign in a parameter is significant. 
	Whitespace before or after the first equals sign is discarded.
	Leading, trailing and internal whitespace in section and parameter 
	names is irrelevant. Leading and trailing whitespace in a parameter 
	value is discarded. Internal whitespace within a parameter value 
	is retained verbatim.</P
><P
>Any line beginning with a semicolon (';') or a hash ('#') 
	character is ignored, as are lines containing only whitespace.</P
><P
>Any line ending in a '\' is continued
	on the next line in the customary UNIX fashion.</P
><P
>The values following the equals sign in parameters are all 
	either a string (no quotes needed) or a boolean, which may be given 
	as yes/no, 0/1 or true/false. Case is not significant in boolean 
	values, but is preserved in string values. Some items such as 
	create modes are numeric.</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="REFSECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN28"
></A
><H2
>SECTION DESCRIPTIONS</H2
><P
>Each section in the configuration file (except for the
	[global] section) describes a shared resource (known
	as a "share"). The section name is the name of the 
	shared resource and the parameters within the section define 
	the shares attributes.</P
><P
>There are three special sections, [global],
	[homes] and [printers], which are
	described under <EM
>special sections</EM
>. The
	following notes apply to ordinary section descriptions.</P
><P
>A share consists of a directory to which access is being 
	given plus a description of the access rights which are granted 
	to the user of the service. Some housekeeping options are 
	also specifiable.</P
><P
>Sections are either file share services (used by the 
	client as an extension of their native file systems) or 
	printable services (used by the client to access print services 
	on the host running the server).</P
><P
>Sections may be designated <EM
>guest</EM
> services,
	in which case no password is required to access them. A specified 
	UNIX <EM
>guest account</EM
> is used to define access
	privileges in this case.</P
><P
>Sections other than guest services will require a password 
	to access them. The client provides the username. As older clients 
	only provide passwords and not usernames, you may specify a list 
	of usernames to check against the password using the "user =" 
	option in the share definition. For modern clients such as 
	Windows 95/98/ME/NT/2000, this should not be necessary.</P
><P
>Note that the access rights granted by the server are 
	masked by the access rights granted to the specified or guest 
	UNIX user by the host system. The server does not grant more
	access than the host system grants.</P
><P
>The following sample section defines a file space share. 
	The user has write access to the path <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>/home/bar</TT
>. 
	The share is accessed via the share name "foo":</P
><TABLE
BORDER="0"
BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
WIDTH="100%"
><TR
><TD
><PRE
CLASS="SCREEN"
>	<TT
CLASS="COMPUTEROUTPUT"
> 	[foo]
 		path = /home/bar
 		read only = no
	</TT
>
	</PRE
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><P
>The following sample section defines a printable share. 
	The share is readonly, but printable. That is, the only write 
	access permitted is via calls to open, write to and close a 
	spool file. The <EM
>guest ok</EM
> parameter means 
	access will be permitted as the default guest user (specified 
	elsewhere):</P
><TABLE
BORDER="0"
BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
WIDTH="100%"
><TR
><TD
><PRE
CLASS="SCREEN"
>	<TT
CLASS="COMPUTEROUTPUT"
> 	[aprinter]
 		path = /usr/spool/public
 		read only = yes
 		printable = yes
 		guest ok = yes
	</TT
>
	</PRE
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="REFSECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN48"
></A
><H2
>SPECIAL SECTIONS</H2
><DIV
CLASS="REFSECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN50"
></A
><H3
>The [global] section</H3
><P
>parameters in this section apply to the server 
		as a whole, or are defaults for sections which do not 
		specifically define certain items. See the notes
		under PARAMETERS for more information.</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="REFSECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN53"
></A
><H3
>The [homes] section</H3
><P
>If a section called homes is included in the 
		configuration file, services connecting clients to their 
		home directories can be created on the fly by the server.</P
><P
>When the connection request is made, the existing 
		sections are scanned. If a match is found, it is used. If no 
		match is found, the requested section name is treated as a 
		user name and looked up in the local password file. If the 
		name exists and the correct password has been given, a share is 
		created by cloning the [homes] section.</P
><P
>Some modifications are then made to the newly 
		created share:</P
><P
></P
><UL
><LI
><P
>The share name is changed from homes to 
		the located username.</P
></LI
><LI
><P
>If no path was given, the path is set to
		the user's home directory.</P
></LI
></UL
><P
>If you decide to use a <EM
>path =</EM
> line 
		in your [homes] section then you may find it useful 
		to use the %S macro. For example :</P
><P
><TT
CLASS="USERINPUT"
><B
>path = /data/pchome/%S</B
></TT
></P
><P
>would be useful if you have different home directories 
		for your PCs than for UNIX access.</P
><P
>This is a fast and simple way to give a large number 
		of clients access to their home directories with a minimum 
		of fuss.</P
><P
>A similar process occurs if the requested section 
		name is "homes", except that the share name is not 
		changed to that of the requesting user. This method of using
		the [homes] section works well if different users share 
		a client PC.</P
><P
>The [homes] section can specify all the parameters 
		a normal service section can specify, though some make more sense 
		than others. The following is a typical and suitable [homes]
		section:</P
><TABLE
BORDER="0"
BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
WIDTH="100%"
><TR
><TD
><PRE
CLASS="SCREEN"
>		<TT
CLASS="COMPUTEROUTPUT"
>	 	[homes]
 			read only = no
		</TT
>
		</PRE
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><P
>An important point is that if guest access is specified 
		in the [homes] section, all home directories will be 
		visible to all clients <EM
>without a password</EM
>. 
		In the very unlikely event that this is actually desirable, it 
		would be wise to also specify <EM
>read only
		access</EM
>.</P
><P
>Note that the <EM
>browseable</EM
> flag for 
		auto home directories will be inherited from the global browseable 
		flag, not the [homes] browseable flag. This is useful as 
		it means setting <EM
>browseable = no</EM
> in
		the [homes] section will hide the [homes] share but make
		any auto home directories visible.</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="REFSECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN79"
></A
><H3
>The [printers] section</H3
><P
>This section works like [homes], 
		but for printers.</P
><P
>If a [printers] section occurs in the 
		configuration file, users are able to connect to any printer 
		specified in the local host's printcap file.</P
><P
>When a connection request is made, the existing sections 
		are scanned. If a match is found, it is used. If no match is found, 
		but a [homes] section exists, it is used as described
		above. Otherwise, the requested section name is treated as a
		printer name and the appropriate printcap file is scanned to see 
		if the requested section name is a valid printer share name. If 
		a match is found, a new printer share is created by cloning 
		the [printers] section.</P
><P
>A few modifications are then made to the newly created 
		share:</P
><P
></P
><UL
><LI
><P
>The share name is set to the located printer 
		name</P
></LI
><LI
><P
>If no printer name was given, the printer name 
		is set to the located printer name</P
></LI
><LI
><P
>If the share does not permit guest access and 
		no username was given, the username is set to the located 
		printer name.</P
></LI
></UL
><P
>Note that the [printers] service MUST be 
		printable - if you specify otherwise, the server will refuse 
		to load the configuration file.</P
><P
>Typically the path specified would be that of a 
		world-writeable spool directory with the sticky bit set on 
		it. A typical [printers] entry would look like 
		this:</P
><TABLE
BORDER="0"
BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
WIDTH="100%"
><TR
><TD
><PRE
CLASS="SCREEN"
><TT
CLASS="COMPUTEROUTPUT"
>	 	[printers]
 			path = /usr/spool/public
 			guest ok = yes
 			printable = yes 
		</TT
></PRE
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><P
>All aliases given for a printer in the printcap file 
		are legitimate printer names as far as the server is concerned. 
		If your printing subsystem doesn't work like that, you will have 
		to set up a pseudo-printcap. This is a file consisting of one or 
		more lines like this:</P
><TABLE
BORDER="0"
BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
WIDTH="100%"
><TR
><TD
><PRE
CLASS="SCREEN"
>		<TT
CLASS="COMPUTEROUTPUT"
>	        alias|alias|alias|alias...    
		</TT
>
		</PRE
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><P
>Each alias should be an acceptable printer name for 
		your printing subsystem. In the [global] section, specify 
		the new file as your printcap.  The server will then only recognize 
		names found in your pseudo-printcap, which of course can contain 
		whatever aliases you like. The same technique could be used 
		simply to limit access to a subset of your local printers.</P
><P
>An alias, by the way, is defined as any component of the 
		first entry of a printcap record. Records are separated by newlines,
		components (if there are more than one) are separated by vertical 
		bar symbols ('|').</P
><P
>NOTE: On SYSV systems which use lpstat to determine what 
		printers are defined on the system you may be able to use
		"printcap name = lpstat" to automatically obtain a list 
		of printers. See the "printcap name" option 
		for more details.</P
></DIV
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="REFSECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN102"
></A
><H2
>PARAMETERS</H2
><P
>parameters define the specific attributes of sections.</P
><P
>Some parameters are specific to the [global] section
	(e.g., <EM
>security</EM
>).  Some parameters are usable 
	in all sections (e.g., <EM
>create mode</EM
>). All others 
	are permissible only in normal sections. For the purposes of the 
	following descriptions the [homes] and [printers]
	sections will be considered normal.  The letter <EM
>G</EM
> 
	in parentheses indicates that a parameter is specific to the
	[global] section. The letter <EM
>S</EM
>
	indicates that a parameter can be specified in a service specific
	section. Note that all <EM
>S</EM
> parameters can also be specified in 
	the [global] section - in which case they will define
	the default behavior for all services.</P
><P
>parameters are arranged here in alphabetical order - this may 
	not create best bedfellows, but at least you can find them! Where
	there are synonyms, the preferred synonym is described, others refer 
	to the preferred synonym.</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="REFSECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN112"
></A
><H2
>VARIABLE SUBSTITUTIONS</H2
><P
>Many of the strings that are settable in the config file 
	can take substitutions. For example the option "path =
	/tmp/%u" would be interpreted as "path = 
	/tmp/john" if the user connected with the username john.</P
><P
>These substitutions are mostly noted in the descriptions below, 
	but there are some general substitutions which apply whenever they 
	might be relevant. These are:</P
><P
></P
><DIV
CLASS="VARIABLELIST"
><DL
><DT
>%S</DT
><DD
><P
>the name of the current service, if any.</P
></DD
><DT
>%P</DT
><DD
><P
>the root directory of the current service, 
		if any.</P
></DD
><DT
>%u</DT
><DD
><P
>user name of the current service, if any.</P
></DD
><DT
>%g</DT
><DD
><P
>primary group name of %u.</P
></DD
><DT
>%U</DT
><DD
><P
>session user name (the user name that the client 
		wanted, not necessarily the same as the one they got).</P
></DD
><DT
>%G</DT
><DD
><P
>primary group name of %U.</P
></DD
><DT
>%H</DT
><DD
><P
>the home directory of the user given 
		by %u.</P
></DD
><DT
>%v</DT
><DD
><P
>the Samba version.</P
></DD
><DT
>%h</DT
><DD
><P
>the Internet hostname that Samba is running 
		on.</P
></DD
><DT
>%m</DT
><DD
><P
>the NetBIOS name of the client machine 
		(very useful).</P
></DD
><DT
>%L</DT
><DD
><P
>the NetBIOS name of the server. This allows you 
		to change your config based on what the client calls you. Your 
		server can have a "dual personality".</P
><P
>Note that this paramater is not available when Samba listens
                on port 445, as clients no longer send this information </P
></DD
><DT
>%M</DT
><DD
><P
>the Internet name of the client machine.
		</P
></DD
><DT
>%N</DT
><DD
><P
>the name of your NIS home directory server.  
		This is obtained from your NIS auto.map entry.  If you have 
		not compiled Samba with the <EM
>--with-automount</EM
> 
		option then this value will be the same as %L.</P
></DD
><DT
>%p</DT
><DD
><P
>the path of the service's home directory, 
		obtained from your NIS auto.map entry. The NIS auto.map entry 
		is split up as "%N:%p".</P
></DD
><DT
>%R</DT
><DD
><P
>the selected protocol level after 
		protocol negotiation. It can be one of CORE, COREPLUS, 
		LANMAN1, LANMAN2 or NT1.</P
></DD
><DT
>%d</DT
><DD
><P
>The process id of the current server
		process.</P
></DD
><DT
>%a</DT
><DD
><P
>the architecture of the remote
		machine. Only some are recognized, and those may not be 
		100% reliable. It currently recognizes Samba, WfWg, Win95,
		WinNT and Win2k. Anything else will be known as 
		"UNKNOWN". If it gets it wrong then sending a level 
		3 log to <A
HREF="mailto:samba@samba.org"
TARGET="_top"
>samba@samba.org
		</A
> should allow it to be fixed.</P
></DD
><DT
>%I</DT
><DD
><P
>The IP address of the client machine.</P
></DD
><DT
>%T</DT
><DD
><P
>the current date and time.</P
></DD
><DT
>%$(<TT
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>envvar</I
></TT
>)</DT
><DD
><P
>The value of the environment variable
		<TT
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>envar</I
></TT
>.</P
></DD
></DL
></DIV
><P
>There are some quite creative things that can be done 
	with these substitutions and other smb.conf options.</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="REFSECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN203"
></A
><H2
>NAME MANGLING</H2
><P
>Samba supports "name mangling" so that DOS and 
	Windows clients can use files that don't conform to the 8.3 format. 
	It can also be set to adjust the case of 8.3 format filenames.</P
><P
>There are several options that control the way mangling is 
	performed, and they are grouped here rather than listed separately. 
	For the defaults look at the output of the testparm program. </P
><P
>All of these options can be set separately for each service 
	(or globally, of course). </P
><P
>The options are: </P
><P
></P
><DIV
CLASS="VARIABLELIST"
><DL
><DT
>mangling method</DT
><DD
><P
> controls the algorithm used for the generating
		the mangled names. Can take two different values, "hash" and
		"hash2". "hash" is  the default and is the algorithm that has been
		used in Samba for many years. "hash2" is a newer and considered
		a better algorithm (generates less collisions) in the names.
		However, many Win32 applications store the
		mangled names and so changing to the new algorithm must not be done
		lightly as these applications may break unless reinstalled.
		New installations of Samba may set the default to hash2.
		Default <EM
>hash</EM
>.</P
></DD
><DT
>mangle case = yes/no</DT
><DD
><P
> controls if names that have characters that 
		aren't of the "default" case are mangled. For example, 
		if this is yes then a name like "Mail" would be mangled. 
		Default <EM
>no</EM
>.</P
></DD
><DT
>case sensitive = yes/no</DT
><DD
><P
>controls whether filenames are case sensitive. If 
		they aren't then Samba must do a filename search and match on passed 
		names. Default <EM
>no</EM
>.</P
></DD
><DT
>default case = upper/lower</DT
><DD
><P
>controls what the default case is for new 
		filenames. Default <EM
>lower</EM
>.</P
></DD
><DT
>preserve case = yes/no</DT
><DD
><P
>controls if new files are created with the 
		case that the client passes, or if they are forced to be the 
		"default" case. Default <EM
>yes</EM
>.
		</P
></DD
><DT
>short preserve case = yes/no</DT
><DD
><P
>controls if new files which conform to 8.3 syntax,
		that is all in upper case and of suitable length, are created 
		upper case, or if they are forced to be the "default" 
		case. This option can be use with "preserve case = yes" 
		to permit long filenames to retain their case, while short names 
		are lowercased. Default <EM
>yes</EM
>.</P
></DD
></DL
></DIV
><P
>By default, Samba 2.2 has the same semantics as a Windows 
	NT server, in that it is case insensitive but case preserving.</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="REFSECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN241"
></A
><H2
>NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION</H2
><P
>There are a number of ways in which a user can connect 
	to a service. The server uses the following steps in determining 
	if it will allow a connection to a specified service. If all the 
	steps fail, then the connection request is rejected.  However, if one of the 
	steps succeeds, then the following steps are not checked.</P
><P
>If the service is marked "guest only = yes" and the
	server is running with share-level security ("security = share")
	then steps 1 to 5 are skipped.</P
><P
></P
><OL
TYPE="1"
><LI
><P
>If the client has passed a username/password 
		pair and that username/password pair is validated by the UNIX 
		system's password programs then the connection is made as that 
		username. Note that this includes the 
		\\server\service%<TT
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>username</I
></TT
> method of passing 
		a username.</P
></LI
><LI
><P
>If the client has previously registered a username 
		with the system and now supplies a correct password for that 
		username then the connection is allowed.</P
></LI
><LI
><P
>The client's NetBIOS name and any previously 
		used user names are checked against the supplied password, if 
		they match then the connection is allowed as the corresponding 
		user.</P
></LI
><LI
><P
>If the client has previously validated a
		username/password pair with the server and the client has passed 
		the validation token then that username is used. </P
></LI
><LI
><P
>If a "user = " field is given in the
		<TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>smb.conf</TT
> file for the service and the client 
		has supplied a password, and that password matches (according to 
		the UNIX system's password checking) with one of the usernames 
		from the "user =" field then the connection is made as 
		the username in the "user =" line. If one 
		of the username in the "user =" list begins with a
		'@' then that name expands to a list of names in 
		the group of the same name.</P
></LI
><LI
><P
>If the service is a guest service then a 
		connection is made as the username given in the "guest 
		account =" for the service, irrespective of the 
		supplied password.</P
></LI
></OL
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="REFSECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN260"
></A
><H2
>COMPLETE LIST OF GLOBAL PARAMETERS</H2
><P
>Here is a list of all global parameters. See the section of 
	each parameter for details.  Note that some are synonyms.</P
><P
></P
><UL
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#ACLCOMPATIBILITY"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>acl compatibility</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#ADDPRINTERCOMMAND"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>add printer command</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#ADDSHARECOMMAND"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>add share command</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#ADDUSERSCRIPT"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>add user script</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#ALLOWTRUSTEDDOMAINS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>allow trusted domains</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#ANNOUNCEAS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>announce as</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#ANNOUNCEVERSION"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>announce version</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#AUTOSERVICES"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>auto services</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#BINDINTERFACESONLY"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>bind interfaces only</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#BROWSELIST"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>browse list</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#CHANGENOTIFYTIMEOUT"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>change notify timeout</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#CHANGESHARECOMMAND"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>change share command</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#CHARACTERSET"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>character set</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#CLIENTCODEPAGE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>client code page</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#CODEPAGEDIRECTORY"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>code page directory</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#CODINGSYSTEM"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>coding system</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#CONFIGFILE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>config file</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#DEADTIME"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>deadtime</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#DEBUGHIRESTIMESTAMP"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>debug hires timestamp</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#DEBUGPID"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>debug pid</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#DEBUGTIMESTAMP"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>debug timestamp</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#DEBUGUID"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>debug uid</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#DEBUGLEVEL"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>debuglevel</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#DEFAULT"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>default</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#DEFAULTSERVICE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>default service</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#DELETEPRINTERCOMMAND"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>delete printer command</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#DELETESHARECOMMAND"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>delete share command</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#DELETEUSERSCRIPT"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>delete user script</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#DFREECOMMAND"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>dfree command</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#DISABLESPOOLSS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>disable spoolss</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#DNSPROXY"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>dns proxy</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#DOMAINADMINGROUP"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>domain admin group</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#DOMAINGUESTGROUP"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>domain guest group</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#DOMAINLOGONS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>domain logons</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#DOMAINMASTER"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>domain master</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#ENCRYPTPASSWORDS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>encrypt passwords</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#ENHANCEDBROWSING"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>enhanced browsing</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#ENUMPORTSCOMMAND"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>enumports command</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#GETWDCACHE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>getwd cache</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#HIDELOCALUSERS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>hide local users</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#HIDEUNREADABLE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>hide unreadable</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#HOMEDIRMAP"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>homedir map</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#HOSTMSDFS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>host msdfs</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#HOSTSEQUIV"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>hosts equiv</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#INTERFACES"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>interfaces</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#KEEPALIVE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>keepalive</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#KERNELOPLOCKS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>kernel oplocks</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#LANMANAUTH"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>lanman auth</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#LARGEREADWRITE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>large readwrite</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#LDAPADMINDN"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>ldap admin dn</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#LDAPFILTER"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>ldap filter</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#LDAPPORT"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>ldap port</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#LDAPSERVER"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>ldap server</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#LDAPSSL"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>ldap ssl</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#LDAPSUFFIX"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>ldap suffix</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#LMANNOUNCE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>lm announce</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#LMINTERVAL"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>lm interval</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#LOADPRINTERS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>load printers</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#LOCALMASTER"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>local master</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#LOCKDIR"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>lock dir</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#LOCKDIRECTORY"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>lock directory</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#LOCKSPINCOUNT"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>lock spin count</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#LOCKSPINTIME"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>lock spin time</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#PIDDIRECTORY"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>pid directory</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#LOGFILE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>log file</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#LOGLEVEL"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>log level</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#LOGONDRIVE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>logon drive</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#LOGONHOME"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>logon home</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#LOGONPATH"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>logon path</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#LOGONSCRIPT"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>logon script</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#LPQCACHETIME"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>lpq cache time</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#MACHINEPASSWORDTIMEOUT"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>machine password timeout</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#MANGLEDSTACK"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>mangled stack</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#MANGLINGMETHOD"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>mangling method</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#MAPTOGUEST"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>map to guest</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#MAXDISKSIZE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>max disk size</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#MAXLOGSIZE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>max log size</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#MAXMUX"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>max mux</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#MAXOPENFILES"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>max open files</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#MAXPROTOCOL"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>max protocol</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#MAXSMBDPROCESSES"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>max smbd processes</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#MAXTTL"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>max ttl</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#MAXWINSTTL"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>max wins ttl</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#MAXXMIT"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>max xmit</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#MESSAGECOMMAND"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>message command</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#MINPASSWDLENGTH"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>min passwd length</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#MINPASSWORDLENGTH"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>min password length</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#MINPROTOCOL"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>min protocol</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#MINWINSTTL"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>min wins ttl</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#NAMERESOLVEORDER"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>name resolve order</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#NETBIOSALIASES"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>netbios aliases</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#NETBIOSNAME"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>netbios name</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#NETBIOSSCOPE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>netbios scope</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#NISHOMEDIR"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>nis homedir</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#NTPIPESUPPORT"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>nt pipe support</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#NTSMBSUPPORT"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>nt smb support</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#NTSTATUSSUPPORT"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>nt status support</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#NULLPASSWORDS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>null passwords</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#OBEYPAMRESTRICTIONS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>obey pam restrictions</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#OPLOCKBREAKWAITTIME"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>oplock break wait time</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#OSLEVEL"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>os level</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#OS2DRIVERMAP"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>os2 driver map</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#PAMPASSWORDCHANGE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>pam password change</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#PANICACTION"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>panic action</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#PASSWDCHAT"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>passwd chat</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#PASSWDCHATDEBUG"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>passwd chat debug</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#PASSWDPROGRAM"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>passwd program</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#PASSWORDLEVEL"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>password level</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#PASSWORDSERVER"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>password server</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#PREFEREDMASTER"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>prefered master</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#PREFERREDMASTER"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>preferred master</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#PRELOAD"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>preload</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#PRINTCAP"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>printcap</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#PRINTCAPNAME"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>printcap name</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#PRINTERDRIVERFILE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>printer driver file</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#PROTOCOL"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>protocol</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#READBMPX"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>read bmpx</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#READRAW"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>read raw</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#READSIZE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>read size</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#REMOTEANNOUNCE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>remote announce</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#REMOTEBROWSESYNC"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>remote browse sync</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#RESTRICTANONYMOUS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>restrict anonymous</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#ROOT"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>root</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#ROOTDIR"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>root dir</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#ROOTDIRECTORY"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>root directory</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#SECURITY"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>security</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#SERVERSTRING"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>server string</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#SHOWADDPRINTERWIZARD"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>show add printer wizard</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#SMBPASSWDFILE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>smb passwd file</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#SOCKETADDRESS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>socket address</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#SOCKETOPTIONS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>socket options</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#SOURCEENVIRONMENT"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>source environment</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#SSL"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>ssl</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#SSLCACERTDIR"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>ssl CA certDir</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#SSLCACERTFILE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>ssl CA certFile</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#SSLCIPHERS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>ssl ciphers</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#SSLCLIENTCERT"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>ssl client cert</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#SSLCLIENTKEY"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>ssl client key</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#SSLCOMPATIBILITY"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>ssl compatibility</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#SSLEGDSOCKET"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>ssl egd socket</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#SSLENTROPYBYTES"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>ssl entropy bytes</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#SSLENTROPYFILE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>ssl entropy file</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#SSLHOSTS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>ssl hosts</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#SSLHOSTSRESIGN"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>ssl hosts resign</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#SSLREQUIRECLIENTCERT"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>ssl require clientcert</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#SSLREQUIRESERVERCERT"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>ssl require servercert</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#SSLSERVERCERT"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>ssl server cert</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#SSLSERVERKEY"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>ssl server key</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#SSLVERSION"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>ssl version</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#STATCACHE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>stat cache</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#STATCACHESIZE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>stat cache size</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#STRIPDOT"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>strip dot</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#SYSLOG"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>syslog</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#SYSLOGONLY"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>syslog only</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#TEMPLATEHOMEDIR"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>template homedir</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#TEMPLATESHELL"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>template shell</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#TIMEOFFSET"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>time offset</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#TIMESERVER"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>time server</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#TIMESTAMPLOGS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>timestamp logs</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#TOTALPRINTJOBS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>total print jobs</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#UNIXEXTENSIONS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>unix extensions</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#UNIXPASSWORDSYNC"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>unix password sync</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#UPDATEENCRYPTED"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>update encrypted</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#USEMMAP"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>use mmap</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#USERHOSTS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>use rhosts</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#USERNAMELEVEL"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>username level</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#USERNAMEMAP"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>username map</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#UTMP"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>utmp</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#UTMPDIRECTORY"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>utmp directory</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#VALIDCHARS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>valid chars</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#WINBINDCACHETIME"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>winbind cache time</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#WINBINDENUMUSERS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>winbind enum users</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#WINBINDENUMGROUPS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>winbind enum groups</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#WINBINDGID"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>winbind gid</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#WINBINDSEPARATOR"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>winbind separator</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#WINBINDUID"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>winbind uid</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#WINBINDUSEDEFAULTDOMAIN"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>winbind use default domain</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#WINSHOOK"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>wins hook</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#WINSPROXY"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>wins proxy</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#WINSSERVER"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>wins server</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#WINSSUPPORT"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>wins support</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#WORKGROUP"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>workgroup</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#WRITERAW"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>write raw</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
></UL
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="REFSECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN996"
></A
><H2
>COMPLETE LIST OF SERVICE PARAMETERS</H2
><P
>Here is a list of all service parameters. See the section on 
	each parameter for details. Note that some are synonyms.</P
><P
></P
><UL
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#ADMINUSERS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>admin users</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#ALLOWHOSTS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>allow hosts</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#AVAILABLE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>available</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#BLOCKINGLOCKS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>blocking locks</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#BLOCKSIZE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>block size</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#BROWSABLE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>browsable</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#BROWSEABLE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>browseable</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#CASESENSITIVE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>case sensitive</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#CASESIGNAMES"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>casesignames</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#COMMENT"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>comment</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#COPY"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>copy</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#CREATEMASK"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>create mask</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#CREATEMODE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>create mode</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#CSCPOLICY"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>csc policy</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#DEFAULTCASE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>default case</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#DEFAULTDEVMODE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>default devmode</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#DELETEREADONLY"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>delete readonly</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#DELETEVETOFILES"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>delete veto files</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#DENYHOSTS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>deny hosts</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#DIRECTORY"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>directory</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#DIRECTORYMASK"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>directory mask</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#DIRECTORYMODE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>directory mode</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#DIRECTORYSECURITYMASK"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>directory security mask</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#DONTDESCEND"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>dont descend</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#DOSFILEMODE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>dos filemode</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#DOSFILETIMERESOLUTION"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>dos filetime resolution</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#DOSFILETIMES"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>dos filetimes</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#EXEC"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>exec</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#FAKEDIRECTORYCREATETIMES"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>fake directory create times</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#FAKEOPLOCKS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>fake oplocks</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#FOLLOWSYMLINKS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>follow symlinks</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#FORCECREATEMODE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>force create mode</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#FORCEDIRECTORYMODE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>force directory mode</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#FORCEDIRECTORYSECURITYMODE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>force directory security mode</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#FORCEGROUP"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>force group</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#FORCESECURITYMODE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>force security mode</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#FORCEUNKNOWNACLUSER"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>force unknown acl user</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#FORCEUSER"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>force user</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#FSTYPE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>fstype</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#GROUP"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>group</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#GUESTACCOUNT"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>guest account</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#GUESTOK"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>guest ok</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#GUESTONLY"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>guest only</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#HIDEDOTFILES"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>hide dot files</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#HIDEFILES"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>hide files</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#HOSTSALLOW"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>hosts allow</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#HOSTSDENY"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>hosts deny</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#INCLUDE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>include</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#INHERITACLS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>inherit acls</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#INHERITPERMISSIONS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>inherit permissions</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#INVALIDUSERS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>invalid users</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#LEVEL2OPLOCKS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>level2 oplocks</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#LOCKING"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>locking</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#LPPAUSECOMMAND"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>lppause command</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#LPQCOMMAND"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>lpq command</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#LPRESUMECOMMAND"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>lpresume command</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#LPRMCOMMAND"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>lprm command</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#MAGICOUTPUT"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>magic output</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#MAGICSCRIPT"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>magic script</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#MANGLECASE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>mangle case</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#MANGLEDMAP"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>mangled map</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#MANGLEDNAMES"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>mangled names</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#MANGLINGCHAR"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>mangling char</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#MAPARCHIVE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>map archive</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#MAPHIDDEN"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>map hidden</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#MAPSYSTEM"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>map system</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#MAXCONNECTIONS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>max connections</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#MAXPRINTJOBS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>max print jobs</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#MINPRINTSPACE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>min print space</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#MSDFSROOT"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>msdfs root</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#NTACLSUPPORT"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>nt acl support</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#ONLYGUEST"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>only guest</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#ONLYUSER"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>only user</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#OPLOCKCONTENTIONLIMIT"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>oplock contention limit</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#OPLOCKS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>oplocks</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#PATH"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>path</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#POSIXLOCKING"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>posix locking</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#POSTEXEC"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>postexec</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#POSTSCRIPT"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>postscript</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#PREEXEC"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>preexec</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#PREEXECCLOSE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>preexec close</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#PRESERVECASE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>preserve case</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#PRINTCOMMAND"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>print command</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#PRINTOK"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>print ok</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#PRINTABLE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>printable</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#PRINTER"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>printer</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#PRINTERADMIN"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>printer admin</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#PRINTERDRIVER"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>printer driver</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#PRINTERDRIVERLOCATION"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>printer driver location</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#PRINTERNAME"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>printer name</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#PRINTING"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>printing</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#PROFILEACLS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>profile acls</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#PUBLIC"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>public</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#QUEUEPAUSECOMMAND"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>queuepause command</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#QUEUERESUMECOMMAND"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>queueresume command</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#READLIST"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>read list</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#READONLY"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>read only</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#ROOTPOSTEXEC"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>root postexec</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#ROOTPREEXEC"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>root preexec</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#ROOTPREEXECCLOSE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>root preexec close</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#SECURITYMASK"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>security mask</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#SETDIRECTORY"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>set directory</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#SHAREMODES"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>share modes</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#SHORTPRESERVECASE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>short preserve case</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#STATUS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>status</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#STRICTALLOCATE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>strict allocate</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#STRICTLOCKING"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>strict locking</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#STRICTSYNC"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>strict sync</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#SYNCALWAYS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>sync always</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#USECLIENTDRIVER"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>use client driver</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#USESENDFILE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>use sendfile</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#USER"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>user</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#USERNAME"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>username</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#USERS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>users</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#VALIDUSERS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>valid users</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#VETOFILES"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>veto files</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#VETOOPLOCKFILES"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>veto oplock files</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#VFSOBJECT"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>vfs object</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#VFSOPTIONS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>vfs options</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#VOLUME"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>volume</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#WIDELINKS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>wide links</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#WRITABLE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>writable</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#WRITECACHESIZE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>write cache size</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#WRITELIST"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>write list</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#WRITEOK"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>write ok</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><A
HREF="#WRITEABLE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>writeable</I
></TT
></A
></P
></LI
></UL
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="REFSECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN1504"
></A
><H2
>EXPLANATION OF EACH PARAMETER</H2
><P
></P
><DIV
CLASS="VARIABLELIST"
><DL
><DT
><A
NAME="ACLCOMPATIBILITY"
></A
>acl compatibility (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>New in Samba 2.2.8 and above, this string parameter tells
		smbd if it should modify any Windows access control lists created
		from POSIX access control lists to remove features which are not
		supported by Windows 2000 but not supported by the Windows NT ACL edit.
		control.</P
><P
>By default this parameter is set automatically by detecting the
		client type and is set to "true" if the client is Windows NT.</P
><P
>Default: <EM
>client detected</EM
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>acl compatibility = Win2k</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>acl compatibility = winnt</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="ADDPRINTERCOMMAND"
></A
>add printer command (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>With the introduction of MS-RPC based printing
		support for Windows NT/2000 clients in Samba 2.2, The MS Add
		Printer Wizard (APW) icon is now also available in the 
		"Printers..." folder displayed a share listing.  The APW
		allows for printers to be add remotely to a Samba or Windows 
		NT/2000 print server.</P
><P
>For a Samba host this means that the printer must be 
		physically added to the underlying printing system.  The <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>add 
		printer command</I
></TT
> defines a script to be run which 
		will perform the necessary operations for adding the printer
		to the print system and to add the appropriate service definition 
		to the  <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>smb.conf</TT
> file in order that it can be 
		shared by <A
HREF="smbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbd(8)</B
>
		</A
>.</P
><P
>The <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>add printer command</I
></TT
> is
		automatically invoked with the following parameter (in 
		order:</P
><P
></P
><UL
><LI
><P
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>printer name</I
></TT
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>share name</I
></TT
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>port name</I
></TT
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>driver name</I
></TT
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>location</I
></TT
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>Windows 9x driver location</I
></TT
>
			</P
></LI
></UL
><P
>All parameters are filled in from the PRINTER_INFO_2 structure sent 
		by the Windows NT/2000 client with one exception.  The "Windows 9x
		driver location" parameter is included for backwards compatibility
		only.  The remaining fields in the structure are generated from answers
		to the APW questions.</P
><P
>Once the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>add printer command</I
></TT
> has 
		been executed, <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbd</B
> will reparse the <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>		smb.conf</TT
> to determine if the share defined by the APW
		exists.  If the sharename is still invalid, then <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbd
		</B
> will return an ACCESS_DENIED error to the client.</P
><P
>See also <A
HREF="#DELETEPRINTERCOMMAND"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		delete printer command</I
></TT
></A
>, <A
HREF="#PRINTING"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>printing</I
></TT
></A
>,
		<A
HREF="#SHOWADDPRINTERWIZARD"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>show add
		printer wizard</I
></TT
></A
></P
><P
>Default: <EM
>none</EM
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>addprinter command = /usr/bin/addprinter
		</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="ADDSHARECOMMAND"
></A
>add share command (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>Samba 2.2.0 introduced the ability to dynamically 
		add and delete shares via the Windows NT 4.0 Server Manager.  The 
		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>add share command</I
></TT
> is used to define an 
		external program or script which will add a new service definition 
		to <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>smb.conf</TT
>.  In order to successfully 
		execute the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>add share command</I
></TT
>, <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbd</B
>
		requires that the administrator be connected using a root account (i.e. 
		uid == 0).
		</P
><P
>		When executed, <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbd</B
> will automatically invoke the 
		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>add share command</I
></TT
> with four parameters.
		</P
><P
></P
><UL
><LI
><P
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>configFile</I
></TT
> - the location 
			of the global <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>smb.conf</TT
> file. 
			</P
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>shareName</I
></TT
> - the name of the new 
			share.
			</P
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>pathName</I
></TT
> - path to an **existing**
			directory on disk.
			</P
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>comment</I
></TT
> - comment string to associate 
			with the new share.
			</P
></LI
></UL
><P
>		This parameter is only used for add file shares.  To add printer shares, 
		see the <A
HREF="#ADDPRINTERCOMMAND"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>add printer 
		command</I
></TT
></A
>.
		</P
><P
>		See also <A
HREF="#CHANGESHARECOMMAND"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>change share 
		command</I
></TT
></A
>, <A
HREF="#DELETESHARECOMMAND"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>delete share
		command</I
></TT
></A
>.
		</P
><P
>Default: <EM
>none</EM
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>add share command = /usr/local/bin/addshare</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="ADDUSERSCRIPT"
></A
>add user script (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This is the full pathname to a script that will 
		be run <EM
>AS ROOT</EM
> by <A
HREF="smbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>smbd(8)
		</A
> under special circumstances described below.</P
><P
>Normally, a Samba server requires that UNIX users are 
		created for all users accessing files on this server. For sites 
		that use Windows NT account databases as their primary user database 
		creating these users and keeping the user list in sync with the 
		Windows NT PDC is an onerous task. This option allows <A
HREF="smbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>smbd</A
> to create the required UNIX users 
		<EM
>ON DEMAND</EM
> when a user accesses the Samba server.</P
><P
>In order to use this option, <A
HREF="smbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>smbd</A
> 
		must <EM
>NOT</EM
> be set to <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>security = share</I
></TT
>
		and <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>add user script</I
></TT
>
		must be set to a full pathname for a script that will create a UNIX 
		user given one argument of <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>%u</I
></TT
>, which expands into 
		the UNIX user name to create.</P
><P
>When the Windows user attempts to access the Samba server, 
		at login (session setup in the SMB protocol) time, <A
HREF="smbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>		smbd</A
> contacts the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>password server</I
></TT
> and 
		attempts to authenticate the given user with the given password. If the 
		authentication succeeds then <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbd</B
> 
		attempts to find a UNIX user in the UNIX password database to map the 
		Windows user into. If this lookup fails, and <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>add user script
		</I
></TT
> is set then <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbd</B
> will
		call the specified script <EM
>AS ROOT</EM
>, expanding 
		any <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>%u</I
></TT
> argument to be the user name to create.</P
><P
>If this script successfully creates the user then <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbd
		</B
> will continue on as though the UNIX user
		already existed. In this way, UNIX users are dynamically created to
		match existing Windows NT accounts.</P
><P
>See also <A
HREF="#SECURITY"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		security</I
></TT
></A
>, <A
HREF="#PASSWORDSERVER"
>		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>password server</I
></TT
></A
>, 
		<A
HREF="#DELETEUSERSCRIPT"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>delete user 
		script</I
></TT
></A
>.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>add user script = &#60;empty string&#62;
		</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>add user script = /usr/local/samba/bin/add_user 
		%u</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="ADMINUSERS"
></A
>admin users (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This is a list of users who will be granted 
		administrative privileges on the share. This means that they 
		will do all file operations as the super-user (root).</P
><P
>You should use this option very carefully, as any user in 
		this list will be able to do anything they like on the share, 
		irrespective of file permissions.</P
><P
>Default: <EM
>no admin users</EM
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>admin users = jason</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="ALLOWHOSTS"
></A
>allow hosts (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>Synonym for <A
HREF="#HOSTSALLOW"
>		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>hosts allow</I
></TT
></A
>.</P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="ALLOWTRUSTEDDOMAINS"
></A
>allow trusted domains (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This option only takes effect when the <A
HREF="#SECURITY"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>security</I
></TT
></A
> option is set to 
		<TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>server</TT
> or <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>domain</TT
>.  
		If it is set to no, then attempts to connect to a resource from 
		a domain or workgroup other than the one which <A
HREF="smbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>smbd</A
> is running 
		in will fail, even if that domain is trusted by the remote server 
		doing the authentication.</P
><P
>This is useful if you only want your Samba server to 
		serve resources to users in the domain it is a member of. As 
		an example, suppose that there are two domains DOMA and DOMB.  DOMB 
		is trusted by DOMA, which contains the Samba server.  Under normal 
		circumstances, a user with an account in DOMB can then access the 
		resources of a UNIX account with the same account name on the 
		Samba server even if they do not have an account in DOMA.  This 
		can make implementing a security boundary difficult.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>allow trusted domains = yes</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="ANNOUNCEAS"
></A
>announce as (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This specifies what type of server 
		<A
HREF="nmbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>nmbd</B
></A
> 
		will announce itself as, to a network neighborhood browse 
		list. By default this is set to Windows NT. The valid options 
		are : "NT Server" (which can also be written as "NT"), 
		"NT Workstation", "Win95" or "WfW" meaning Windows NT Server, 
		Windows NT Workstation, Windows 95 and Windows for Workgroups 
		respectively. Do not change this parameter unless you have a 
		specific need to stop Samba appearing as an NT server as this 
		may prevent Samba servers from participating as browser servers 
		correctly.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>announce as = NT Server</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>announce as = Win95</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="ANNOUNCEVERSION"
></A
>announce version (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This specifies the major and minor version numbers 
		that nmbd will use when announcing itself as a server. The default 
		is 4.9.  Do not change this parameter unless you have a specific 
		need to set a Samba server to be a downlevel server.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>announce version = 4.9</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>announce version = 2.0</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="AUTOSERVICES"
></A
>auto services (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This is a synonym for the <A
HREF="#PRELOAD"
>		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>preload</I
></TT
></A
>.</P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="AVAILABLE"
></A
>available (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter lets you "turn off" a service. If 
		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>available = no</I
></TT
>, then <EM
>ALL</EM
> 
		attempts to connect to the service will fail. Such failures are 
		logged.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>available = yes</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="BINDINTERFACESONLY"
></A
>bind interfaces only (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This global parameter allows the Samba admin 
		to limit what interfaces on a machine will serve SMB requests. If 
		affects file service <A
HREF="smbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>smbd(8)</A
> and 
		name service <A
HREF="nmbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>nmbd(8)</A
> in slightly 
		different ways.</P
><P
>For name service it causes <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>nmbd</B
> to bind 
		to ports 137 and 138 on the interfaces listed in the <A
HREF="#INTERFACES"
>interfaces</A
> parameter. <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>nmbd
		</B
> also binds to the "all addresses" interface (0.0.0.0) 
		on ports 137 and 138 for the purposes of reading broadcast messages. 
		If this option is not set then <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>nmbd</B
> will service 
		name requests on all of these sockets. If <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>bind interfaces
		only</I
></TT
> is set then <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>nmbd</B
> will check the 
		source address of any packets coming in on the broadcast sockets 
		and discard any that don't match the broadcast addresses of the 
		interfaces in the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>interfaces</I
></TT
> parameter list. 
		As unicast packets are received on the other sockets it allows 
		<B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>nmbd</B
> to refuse to serve names to machines that 
		send packets that arrive through any interfaces not listed in the
		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>interfaces</I
></TT
> list.  IP Source address spoofing
		does defeat this simple check, however so it must not be used
		seriously as a security feature for <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>nmbd</B
>.</P
><P
>For file service it causes <A
HREF="smbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>smbd(8)</A
>
		to bind only to the interface list given in the <A
HREF="#INTERFACES"
>		interfaces</A
> parameter. This restricts the networks that 
		<B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbd</B
> will serve to packets coming in those 
		interfaces.  Note that you should not use this parameter for machines 
		that are serving PPP or other intermittent or non-broadcast network 
		interfaces as it will not cope with non-permanent interfaces.</P
><P
>If <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>bind interfaces only</I
></TT
> is set then 
		unless the network address <EM
>127.0.0.1</EM
> is added 
		to the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>interfaces</I
></TT
> parameter list <A
HREF="smbpasswd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbpasswd(8)</B
></A
> 
		and <A
HREF="swat.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>swat(8)</B
></A
> may 
		not work as expected due to the reasons covered below.</P
><P
>To change a users SMB password, the <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbpasswd</B
>
		by default connects to the <EM
>localhost - 127.0.0.1</EM
> 
		address as an SMB client to issue the password change request. If 
		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>bind interfaces only</I
></TT
> is set then unless the 
		network address <EM
>127.0.0.1</EM
> is added to the
		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>interfaces</I
></TT
> parameter list then <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>		smbpasswd</B
> will fail to connect in it's default mode. 
		<B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbpasswd</B
> can be forced to use the primary IP interface 
		of the local host by using its <A
HREF="smbpasswd.8.html#minusr"
TARGET="_top"
>		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>-r <TT
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>remote machine</I
></TT
></I
></TT
>
		</A
> parameter, with <TT
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>remote machine</I
></TT
> set 
		to the IP name of the primary interface of the local host.</P
><P
>The <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>swat</B
> status page tries to connect with
		<B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbd</B
> and <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>nmbd</B
> at the address 
		<EM
>127.0.0.1</EM
> to determine if they are running.  
		Not adding <EM
>127.0.0.1</EM
>  will cause <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>		smbd</B
> and <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>nmbd</B
> to always show
		"not running" even if they really are.  This can prevent <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>		swat</B
> from starting/stopping/restarting <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbd</B
>
		and <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>nmbd</B
>.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>bind interfaces only = no</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="BLOCKSIZE"
></A
>block size (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter controls the behavior of <A
HREF="smbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>smbd(8)</A
> when reporting disk free sizes.
		By default, this reports a disk block size of 1024 bytes.</P
><P
>Changing this parameter may have some effect on the
		efficiency of client writes, this is not yet confirmed. This
		parameter was added to allow advanced administrators to change
		it (usually to a higher value) and test the effect it has on
		client write performance without re-compiling the code. As this
		is an experimental option it may be removed in a future release.
		</P
><P
>Changing this option does not change the disk free reporting
		size, just the block size unit reported to the client.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>block size = 1024</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>block size = 65536</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="BLOCKINGLOCKS"
></A
>blocking locks (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter controls the behavior of <A
HREF="smbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>smbd(8)</A
> when given a request by a client 
		to obtain a byte range lock on a region of an open file, and the 
		request has a time limit associated with it.</P
><P
>If this parameter is set and the lock range requested 
		cannot be immediately satisfied, Samba 2.2 will internally 
		queue the lock request, and periodically attempt to obtain 
		the lock until the timeout period expires.</P
><P
>If this parameter is set to <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>no</TT
>, then 
		Samba 2.2 will behave as previous versions of Samba would and 
		will fail the lock request immediately if the lock range 
		cannot be obtained.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>blocking locks = yes</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="BROWSABLE"
></A
>browsable (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>See the <A
HREF="#BROWSEABLE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		browseable</I
></TT
></A
>.</P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="BROWSELIST"
></A
>browse list (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This controls whether <A
HREF="smbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>		<B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbd(8)</B
></A
> will serve a browse list to 
		a client doing a <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>NetServerEnum</B
> call. Normally 
		set to <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>yes</TT
>. You should never need to change 
		this.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>browse list = yes</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="BROWSEABLE"
></A
>browseable (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This controls whether this share is seen in 
		the list of available shares in a net view and in the browse list.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>browseable = yes</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="CASESENSITIVE"
></A
>case sensitive (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>See the discussion in the section <A
HREF="#AEN203"
>NAME MANGLING</A
>.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>case sensitive = no</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="CASESIGNAMES"
></A
>casesignames (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>Synonym for <A
HREF="#CASESENSITIVE"
>case 
		sensitive</A
>.</P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="CHANGENOTIFYTIMEOUT"
></A
>change notify timeout (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This SMB allows a client to tell a server to 
		"watch" a particular directory for any changes and only reply to
		the SMB request when a change has occurred. Such constant scanning of
		a directory is expensive under UNIX, hence an <A
HREF="smbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>		<B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbd(8)</B
></A
> daemon only performs such a scan 
		on each requested directory once every <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>change notify 
		timeout</I
></TT
> seconds.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>change notify timeout = 60</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>change notify timeout = 300</B
></P
><P
>Would change the scan time to every 5 minutes.</P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="CHANGESHARECOMMAND"
></A
>change share command (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>Samba 2.2.0 introduced the ability to dynamically 
		add and delete shares via the Windows NT 4.0 Server Manager.  The 
		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>change share command</I
></TT
> is used to define an 
		external program or script which will modify an existing service definition 
		in <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>smb.conf</TT
>.  In order to successfully 
		execute the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>change share command</I
></TT
>, <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbd</B
>
		requires that the administrator be connected using a root account (i.e. 
		uid == 0).
		</P
><P
>		When executed, <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbd</B
> will automatically invoke the 
		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>change share command</I
></TT
> with four parameters.
		</P
><P
></P
><UL
><LI
><P
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>configFile</I
></TT
> - the location 
			of the global <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>smb.conf</TT
> file. 
			</P
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>shareName</I
></TT
> - the name of the new 
			share.
			</P
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>pathName</I
></TT
> - path to an **existing**
			directory on disk.
			</P
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>comment</I
></TT
> - comment string to associate 
			with the new share.
			</P
></LI
></UL
><P
>		This parameter is only used modify existing file shares definitions.  To modify 
		printer shares, use the "Printers..." folder as seen when browsing the Samba host.
		</P
><P
>		See also <A
HREF="#ADDSHARECOMMAND"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>add share
		command</I
></TT
></A
>, <A
HREF="#DELETESHARECOMMAND"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>delete 
		share command</I
></TT
></A
>.
		</P
><P
>Default: <EM
>none</EM
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>change share command = /usr/local/bin/addshare</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="CHARACTERSET"
></A
>character set (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This allows <A
HREF="smbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>smbd</A
> to map incoming filenames 
		from a DOS Code page (see the <A
HREF="#CLIENTCODEPAGE"
>client 
		code page</A
> parameter) to several built in UNIX character sets. 
		The built in code page translations are:</P
><P
></P
><UL
><LI
><P
><TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>ISO8859-1</TT
> : Western European 
			UNIX character set. The parameter <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>client code page</I
></TT
>
			<EM
>MUST</EM
> be set to code page 850 if the 
			<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>character set</I
></TT
> parameter is set to
			<TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>ISO8859-1</TT
> in order for the conversion to the 
			UNIX character set to be done correctly.</P
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>ISO8859-2</TT
> : Eastern European 
			UNIX character set. The parameter <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>client code page
			</I
></TT
> <EM
>MUST</EM
> be set to code page 852 if 
			the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
> character set</I
></TT
> parameter is set 
			to <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>ISO8859-2</TT
> in order for the conversion 
			to the UNIX character set to be done correctly. </P
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>ISO8859-5</TT
> : Russian Cyrillic 
			UNIX character set. The parameter <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>client code page
			</I
></TT
> <EM
>MUST</EM
> be set to code page 
			866 if the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>character set </I
></TT
> parameter is 
			set to <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>ISO8859-5</TT
> in order for the conversion 
			to the UNIX character set to be done correctly. </P
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>ISO8859-7</TT
> : Greek UNIX 
			character set. The parameter <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>client code page
			</I
></TT
> <EM
>MUST</EM
> be set to code page 
			737 if the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>character set</I
></TT
> parameter is 
			set to <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>ISO8859-7</TT
> in order for the conversion 
			to the UNIX character set to be done correctly.</P
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>KOI8-R</TT
> : Alternate mapping 
			for Russian Cyrillic UNIX character set. The parameter 
			<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>client code page</I
></TT
> <EM
>MUST</EM
> 
			be set to code page 866 if the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>character set</I
></TT
> 
			parameter is set to <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>KOI8-R</TT
> in order for the 
			conversion to the UNIX character set to be done correctly.</P
></LI
></UL
><P
><EM
>BUG</EM
>. These MSDOS code page to UNIX character 
		set mappings should be dynamic, like the loading of MS DOS code pages, 
		not static.</P
><P
>Normally this parameter is not set, meaning no filename 
		translation is done.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>character set = &#60;empty string&#62;</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>character set = ISO8859-1</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="CLIENTCODEPAGE"
></A
>client code page (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter specifies the DOS code page 
		that the clients accessing Samba are using. To determine what code 
		page a Windows or DOS client is using, open a DOS command prompt 
		and type the command <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>chcp</B
>. This will output 
		the code page. The default for USA MS-DOS, Windows 95, and
		Windows NT releases is code page 437. The default for western 
		European releases of the above operating systems is code page 850.</P
><P
>This parameter tells <A
HREF="smbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>smbd(8)</A
> 
		which of the <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>codepage.<TT
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>XXX</I
></TT
>
		</TT
> files to dynamically load on startup. These files,
		described more fully in the manual page <A
HREF="make_smbcodepage.1.html"
TARGET="_top"
>		<B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>make_smbcodepage(1)</B
></A
>, tell <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>		smbd</B
> how to map lower to upper case characters to provide 
		the case insensitivity of filenames that Windows clients expect.</P
><P
>Samba currently ships with the following code page files :</P
><P
></P
><UL
><LI
><P
>Code Page 437 - MS-DOS Latin US</P
></LI
><LI
><P
>Code Page 737 - Windows '95 Greek</P
></LI
><LI
><P
>Code Page 850 - MS-DOS Latin 1</P
></LI
><LI
><P
>Code Page 852 - MS-DOS Latin 2</P
></LI
><LI
><P
>Code Page 861 - MS-DOS Icelandic</P
></LI
><LI
><P
>Code Page 866 - MS-DOS Cyrillic</P
></LI
><LI
><P
>Code Page 932 - MS-DOS Japanese SJIS</P
></LI
><LI
><P
>Code Page 936 - MS-DOS Simplified Chinese</P
></LI
><LI
><P
>Code Page 949 - MS-DOS Korean Hangul</P
></LI
><LI
><P
>Code Page 950 - MS-DOS Traditional Chinese</P
></LI
></UL
><P
>Thus this parameter may have any of the values 437, 737, 850, 852,
		861, 932, 936, 949, or 950.  If you don't find the codepage you need,
		read the comments in one of the other codepage files and the
		<B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>make_smbcodepage(1)</B
> man page and write one. Please 
		remember to donate it back to the Samba user community.</P
><P
>This parameter co-operates with the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>valid
		chars</I
></TT
> parameter in determining what characters are
		valid in filenames and how capitalization is done. If you set both
		this parameter and the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>valid chars</I
></TT
> parameter
		the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>client code page</I
></TT
> parameter 
		<EM
>MUST</EM
> be set before the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>valid 
		chars</I
></TT
> parameter in the <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>smb.conf</TT
>
		file. The <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>valid chars</I
></TT
> string will then 
		augment the character settings in the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>client code page</I
></TT
> 
		parameter.</P
><P
>If not set, <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>client code page</I
></TT
> defaults 
		to 850.</P
><P
>See also : <A
HREF="#VALIDCHARS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>valid 
		chars</I
></TT
></A
>, <A
HREF="#CODEPAGEDIRECTORY"
>		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>code page directory</I
></TT
></A
></P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>client code page = 850</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>client code page = 936</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="CODEPAGEDIRECTORY"
></A
>code page directory (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>Define the location of the various client code page
		files.</P
><P
>See also <A
HREF="#CLIENTCODEPAGE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>client
		code page</I
></TT
></A
></P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>code page directory = ${prefix}/lib/codepages
		</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>code page directory = /usr/share/samba/codepages
		</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="CODINGSYSTEM"
></A
>coding system (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter is used to determine how incoming 
		Shift-JIS Japanese characters are mapped from the incoming <A
HREF="#CLIENTCODEPAGE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>client code page</I
></TT
>
		</A
> used by the client, into file names in the UNIX filesystem. 
		Only useful if <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>client code page</I
></TT
> is set to 
		932 (Japanese Shift-JIS).  The options are :</P
><P
></P
><UL
><LI
><P
><TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>SJIS</TT
>  - Shift-JIS. Does no 
			conversion of the incoming filename.</P
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>JIS8, J8BB, J8BH, J8@B, 
			J8@J, J8@H </TT
> - Convert from incoming Shift-JIS to eight 
			bit JIS code with different shift-in, shift out codes.</P
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>JIS7, J7BB, J7BH, J7@B, J7@J, 
			J7@H </TT
> - Convert from incoming Shift-JIS to seven bit 
			JIS code with different shift-in, shift out codes.</P
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>JUNET, JUBB, JUBH, JU@B, JU@J, JU@H </TT
> 
			- Convert from incoming Shift-JIS to JUNET code with different shift-in, 
			shift out codes.</P
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>EUC</TT
> - Convert an incoming 
			Shift-JIS character to EUC code.</P
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>HEX</TT
> - Convert an incoming 
			Shift-JIS character to a 3 byte hex representation, i.e. 
			<TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>:AB</TT
>.</P
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>CAP</TT
> - Convert an incoming 
			Shift-JIS character to the 3 byte hex representation used by 
			the Columbia AppleTalk Program (CAP), i.e. <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>:AB</TT
>.  
			This is used for compatibility between Samba and CAP.</P
></LI
></UL
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>coding system = &#60;empty value&#62;</B
>
		</P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="COMMENT"
></A
>comment (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This is a text field that is seen next to a share 
		when a client does a queries the server, either via the network 
		neighborhood or via <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>net view</B
> to list what shares 
		are available.</P
><P
>If you want to set the string that is displayed next to the 
		machine name then see the <A
HREF="#SERVERSTRING"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		server string</I
></TT
></A
> parameter.</P
><P
>Default: <EM
>No comment string</EM
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>comment = Fred's Files</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="CONFIGFILE"
></A
>config file (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This allows you to override the config file 
		to use, instead of the default (usually <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>smb.conf</TT
>). 
		There is a chicken and egg problem here as this option is set 
		in the config file!</P
><P
>For this reason, if the name of the config file has changed 
		when the parameters are loaded then it will reload them from 
		the new config file.</P
><P
>This option takes the usual substitutions, which can 
		be very useful.</P
><P
>If the config file doesn't exist then it won't be loaded 
		(allowing you to special case the config files of just a few 
		clients).</P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>config file = /usr/local/samba/lib/smb.conf.%m
		</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="COPY"
></A
>copy (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter allows you to "clone" service 
		entries. The specified service is simply duplicated under the 
		current service's name. Any parameters specified in the current 
		section will override those in the section being copied.</P
><P
>This feature lets you set up a 'template' service and 
		create similar services easily. Note that the service being 
		copied must occur earlier in the configuration file than the 
		service doing the copying.</P
><P
>Default: <EM
>no value</EM
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>copy = otherservice</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="CREATEMASK"
></A
>create mask (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>A synonym for this parameter is 
		<A
HREF="#CREATEMODE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>create mode</I
></TT
>
		</A
>.</P
><P
>When a file is created, the necessary permissions are 
		calculated according to the mapping from DOS modes to UNIX 
		permissions, and the resulting UNIX mode is then bit-wise 'AND'ed 
		with this parameter. This parameter may be thought of as a bit-wise 
		MASK for the UNIX modes of a file. Any bit <EM
>not</EM
> 
		set here will be removed from the modes set on a file when it is 
		created.</P
><P
>The default value of this parameter removes the 
		'group' and 'other' write and execute bits from the UNIX modes.</P
><P
>Following this Samba will bit-wise 'OR' the UNIX mode created 
		from this parameter with the value of the <A
HREF="#FORCECREATEMODE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>force create mode</I
></TT
></A
>
		parameter which is set to 000 by default.</P
><P
>This parameter does not affect directory modes. See the 
		parameter <A
HREF="#DIRECTORYMODE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>directory mode
		</I
></TT
></A
> for details.</P
><P
>See also the <A
HREF="#FORCECREATEMODE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>force 
		create mode</I
></TT
></A
> parameter for forcing particular mode 
		bits to be set on created files. See also the <A
HREF="#DIRECTORYMODE"
>		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>directory mode</I
></TT
></A
> parameter for masking 
		mode bits on created directories.  See also the <A
HREF="#INHERITPERMISSIONS"
>		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>inherit permissions</I
></TT
></A
> parameter.</P
><P
>Note that this parameter does not apply to permissions
		set by Windows NT/2000 ACL editors. If the administrator wishes to enforce
		a mask on access control lists also, they need to set the <A
HREF="#SECURITYMASK"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>security mask</I
></TT
></A
>.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>create mask = 0744</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>create mask = 0775</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="CREATEMODE"
></A
>create mode (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This is a synonym for <A
HREF="#CREATEMASK"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		create mask</I
></TT
></A
>.</P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="CSCPOLICY"
></A
>csc policy (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This stands for <EM
>client-side caching 
		policy</EM
>, and specifies how clients capable of offline
		caching will cache the files in the share. The valid values
		are: manual, documents, programs, disable.</P
><P
>These values correspond to those used on Windows
		servers.</P
><P
>For example, shares containing roaming profiles can have
		offline caching disabled using <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>csc policy = disable
		</B
>.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>csc policy = manual</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>csc policy = programs</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="DEADTIME"
></A
>deadtime (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>The value of the parameter (a decimal integer) 
		represents the number of minutes of inactivity before a connection 
		is considered dead, and it is disconnected. The deadtime only takes 
		effect if the number of open files is zero.</P
><P
>This is useful to stop a server's resources being 
		exhausted by a large number of inactive connections.</P
><P
>Most clients have an auto-reconnect feature when a 
		connection is broken so in most cases this parameter should be 
		transparent to users.</P
><P
>Using this parameter with a timeout of a few minutes 
		is recommended for most systems.</P
><P
>A deadtime of zero indicates that no auto-disconnection 
		should be performed.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>deadtime = 0</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>deadtime = 15</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="DEBUGHIRESTIMESTAMP"
></A
>debug hires timestamp (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>Sometimes the timestamps in the log messages 
		are needed with a resolution of higher that seconds, this 
		boolean parameter adds microsecond resolution to the timestamp 
		message header when turned on.</P
><P
>Note that the parameter <A
HREF="#DEBUGTIMESTAMP"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		debug timestamp</I
></TT
></A
> must be on for this to have an 
		effect.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>debug hires timestamp = no</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="DEBUGPID"
></A
>debug pid (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>When using only one log file for more then one 
		forked <A
HREF="smbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>smbd</A
>-process there may be hard to follow which process 
		outputs which message. This boolean parameter is adds the process-id 
		to the timestamp message headers in the logfile when turned on.</P
><P
>Note that the parameter <A
HREF="#DEBUGTIMESTAMP"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		debug timestamp</I
></TT
></A
> must be on for this to have an 
		effect.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>debug pid = no</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="DEBUGTIMESTAMP"
></A
>debug timestamp (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>Samba 2.2 debug log messages are timestamped 
		by default. If you are running at a high <A
HREF="#DEBUGLEVEL"
>		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>debug level</I
></TT
></A
> these timestamps
		can be distracting. This boolean parameter allows timestamping 
		to be turned off.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>debug timestamp = yes</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="DEBUGUID"
></A
>debug uid (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>Samba is sometimes run as root and sometime 
		run as the connected user, this boolean parameter inserts the 
		current euid, egid, uid and gid to the timestamp message headers 
		in the log file if turned on.</P
><P
>Note that the parameter <A
HREF="#DEBUGTIMESTAMP"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		debug timestamp</I
></TT
></A
> must be on for this to have an 
		effect.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>debug uid = no</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="DEBUGLEVEL"
></A
>debuglevel (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>Synonym for <A
HREF="#LOGLEVEL"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		log level</I
></TT
></A
>.</P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="DEFAULT"
></A
>default (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>A synonym for <A
HREF="#DEFAULTSERVICE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		default service</I
></TT
></A
>.</P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="DEFAULTCASE"
></A
>default case (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>See the section on <A
HREF="#AEN203"
>		NAME MANGLING</A
>. Also note the <A
HREF="#SHORTPRESERVECASE"
>		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>short preserve case</I
></TT
></A
> parameter.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>default case = lower</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="DEFAULTDEVMODE"
></A
>default devmode (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter is only applicable to <A
HREF="#PRINTOK"
>printable</A
> services.  When smbd is serving
		Printer Drivers to Windows NT/2k/XP clients, each printer on the Samba
		server has a Device Mode which defines things such as paper size and
		orientation and duplex settings.  The device mode can only correctly be
		generated by the printer driver itself (which can only be executed on a
		Win32 platform).  Because smbd is unable to execute the driver code
		to generate the device mode, the default behavior is to set this field
		to NULL.
		</P
><P
>Most problems with serving printer drivers to Windows NT/2k/XP clients
		can be traced to a problem with the generated device mode.  Certain drivers
		will do things such as crashing the client's Explorer.exe with a NULL devmode.
		However, other printer drivers can cause the client's spooler service
		(spoolsv.exe) to die if the devmode was not created by the driver itself
		(i.e. smbd generates a default devmode).
		</P
><P
>This parameter should be used with care and tested with the printer
		driver in question.  It is better to leave the device mode to NULL
		and let the Windows client set the correct values.  Because drivers do not
		do this all the time, setting <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>default devmode = yes</B
>
		will instruct smbd to generate a default one.
		</P
><P
>For more information on Windows NT/2k printing and Device Modes,
		see the <A
HREF="http://msdn.microsoft.com/"
TARGET="_top"
>MSDN documentation</A
>.
		</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>default devmode = no</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="DEFAULTSERVICE"
></A
>default service (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter specifies the name of a service
		which will be connected to if the service actually requested cannot
		be found. Note that the square brackets are <EM
>NOT</EM
>
		given in the parameter value (see example below).</P
><P
>There is no default value for this parameter. If this 
		parameter is not given, attempting to connect to a nonexistent 
		service results in an error.</P
><P
>Typically the default service would be a <A
HREF="#GUESTOK"
>		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>guest ok</I
></TT
></A
>, <A
HREF="#READONLY"
>		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>read-only</I
></TT
></A
> service.</P
><P
>Also note that the apparent service name will be changed 
		to equal that of the requested service, this is very useful as it 
		allows you to use macros like <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>%S</I
></TT
> to make 
		a wildcard service.</P
><P
>Note also that any "_" characters in the name of the service 
		used in the default service will get mapped to a "/". This allows for
		interesting things.</P
><P
>Example:</P
><P
><TABLE
BORDER="0"
BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
WIDTH="90%"
><TR
><TD
><PRE
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
>[global]
	default service = pub
        
[pub]
	path = /%S
		</PRE
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="DELETEPRINTERCOMMAND"
></A
>delete printer command (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>With the introduction of MS-RPC based printer
		support for Windows NT/2000 clients in Samba 2.2, it is now 
		possible to delete printer at run time by issuing the 
		DeletePrinter() RPC call.</P
><P
>For a Samba host this means that the printer must be 
		physically deleted from underlying printing system.  The <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		deleteprinter command</I
></TT
> defines a script to be run which 
		will perform the necessary operations for removing the printer
		from the print system and from <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>smb.conf</TT
>.
		</P
><P
>The <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>delete printer command</I
></TT
> is 
		automatically called with only one parameter: <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		"printer name"</I
></TT
>.</P
><P
>Once the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>delete printer command</I
></TT
> has 
		been executed, <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbd</B
> will reparse the <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>		smb.conf</TT
> to associated printer no longer exists.  
		If the sharename is still valid, then <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbd
		</B
> will return an ACCESS_DENIED error to the client.</P
><P
>See also <A
HREF="#ADDPRINTERCOMMAND"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		add printer command</I
></TT
></A
>, <A
HREF="#PRINTING"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>printing</I
></TT
></A
>,
		<A
HREF="#SHOWADDPRINTERWIZARD"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>show add
		printer wizard</I
></TT
></A
></P
><P
>Default: <EM
>none</EM
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>deleteprinter command = /usr/bin/removeprinter
		</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="DELETEREADONLY"
></A
>delete readonly (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter allows readonly files to be deleted.  
		This is not normal DOS semantics, but is allowed by UNIX.</P
><P
>This option may be useful for running applications such 
		as rcs, where UNIX file ownership prevents changing file 
		permissions, and DOS semantics prevent deletion of a read only file.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>delete readonly = no</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="DELETESHARECOMMAND"
></A
>delete share command (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>Samba 2.2.0 introduced the ability to dynamically 
		add and delete shares via the Windows NT 4.0 Server Manager.  The 
		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>delete share command</I
></TT
> is used to define an 
		external program or script which will remove an existing service 
		definition from <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>smb.conf</TT
>.  In order to successfully 
		execute the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>delete share command</I
></TT
>, <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbd</B
>
		requires that the administrator be connected using a root account (i.e. 
		uid == 0).
		</P
><P
>		When executed, <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbd</B
> will automatically invoke the 
		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>delete share command</I
></TT
> with two parameters.
		</P
><P
></P
><UL
><LI
><P
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>configFile</I
></TT
> - the location 
			of the global <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>smb.conf</TT
> file. 
			</P
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>shareName</I
></TT
> - the name of 
			the existing service.
			</P
></LI
></UL
><P
>		This parameter is only used to remove file shares.  To delete printer shares, 
		see the <A
HREF="#DELETEPRINTERCOMMAND"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>delete printer 
		command</I
></TT
></A
>.
		</P
><P
>		See also <A
HREF="#ADDSHARECOMMAND"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>add share
		command</I
></TT
></A
>, <A
HREF="#CHANGESHARECOMMAND"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>change 
		share command</I
></TT
></A
>.
		</P
><P
>Default: <EM
>none</EM
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>delete share command = /usr/local/bin/delshare</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="DELETEUSERSCRIPT"
></A
>delete user script (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This is the full pathname to a script that will 
		be run <EM
>AS ROOT</EM
> by <A
HREF="smbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>		<B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbd(8)</B
></A
> under special circumstances 
		described below.</P
><P
>Normally, a Samba server requires that UNIX users are 
		created for all users accessing files on this server. For sites 
		that use Windows NT account databases as their primary user database 
		creating these users and keeping the user list in sync with the 
		Windows NT PDC is an onerous task. This option allows <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>		smbd</B
> to delete the required UNIX users <EM
>ON 
		DEMAND</EM
> when a user accesses the Samba server and the 
		Windows NT user no longer exists.</P
><P
>In order to use this option, <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbd</B
> must be 
		set to <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>security = domain</I
></TT
> or <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>security =
		user</I
></TT
> and <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>delete user script</I
></TT
> 
		must be set to a full pathname for a script 
		that will delete a UNIX user given one argument of <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>%u</I
></TT
>, 
		which expands into the UNIX user name to delete.</P
><P
>When the Windows user attempts to access the Samba server, 
		at <EM
>login</EM
> (session setup in the SMB protocol) 
		time, <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbd</B
> contacts the <A
HREF="#PASSWORDSERVER"
>		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>password server</I
></TT
></A
> and attempts to authenticate 
		the given user with the given password. If the authentication fails 
		with the specific Domain error code meaning that the user no longer 
		exists then <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbd</B
> attempts to find a UNIX user in 
		the UNIX password database that matches the Windows user account. If 
		this lookup succeeds, and <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>delete user script</I
></TT
> is 
		set then <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbd</B
> will all the specified script 
		<EM
>AS ROOT</EM
>, expanding any <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>%u</I
></TT
> 
		argument to be the user name to delete.</P
><P
>This script should delete the given UNIX username. In this way, 
		UNIX users are dynamically deleted to match existing Windows NT 
		accounts.</P
><P
>See also <A
HREF="#SECURITYEQUALSDOMAIN"
>security = domain</A
>,
		<A
HREF="#PASSWORDSERVER"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>password server</I
></TT
>
		</A
>, <A
HREF="#ADDUSERSCRIPT"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>add user script</I
></TT
>
		</A
>.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>delete user script = &#60;empty string&#62;
		</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>delete user script = /usr/local/samba/bin/del_user 
		%u</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="DELETEVETOFILES"
></A
>delete veto files (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This option is used when Samba is attempting to 
		delete a directory that contains one or more vetoed directories 
		(see the <A
HREF="#VETOFILES"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>veto files</I
></TT
></A
>
		option).  If this option is set to <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>no</TT
> (the default) then if a vetoed 
		directory contains any non-vetoed files or directories then the 
		directory delete will fail. This is usually what you want.</P
><P
>If this option is set to <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>yes</TT
>, then Samba 
		will attempt to recursively delete any files and directories within 
		the vetoed directory. This can be useful for integration with file 
		serving systems such as NetAtalk which create meta-files within 
		directories you might normally veto DOS/Windows users from seeing 
		(e.g. <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>.AppleDouble</TT
>)</P
><P
>Setting <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>delete veto files = yes</B
> allows these 
		directories to be  transparently deleted when the parent directory 
		is deleted (so long as the user has permissions to do so).</P
><P
>See also the <A
HREF="#VETOFILES"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>veto 
		files</I
></TT
></A
> parameter.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>delete veto files = no</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="DENYHOSTS"
></A
>deny hosts (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>Synonym for <A
HREF="#HOSTSDENY"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>hosts 
		deny</I
></TT
></A
>.</P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="DFREECOMMAND"
></A
>dfree command (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>The <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>dfree command</I
></TT
> setting should 
		only be used on systems where a problem occurs with the internal 
		disk space calculations. This has been known to happen with Ultrix, 
		but may occur with other operating systems. The symptom that was 
		seen was an error of "Abort Retry Ignore" at the end of each 
		directory listing.</P
><P
>This setting allows the replacement of the internal routines to
		calculate the total disk space and amount available with an external
		routine. The example below gives a possible script that might fulfill
		this function.</P
><P
>The external program will be passed a single parameter indicating 
		a directory in the filesystem being queried. This will typically consist
		of the string <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>./</TT
>. The script should return two 
		integers in ASCII. The first should be the total disk space in blocks, 
		and the second should be the number of available blocks. An optional 
		third return value can give the block size in bytes. The default 
		blocksize is 1024 bytes.</P
><P
>Note: Your script should <EM
>NOT</EM
> be setuid or 
		setgid and should be owned by (and writeable only by) root!</P
><P
>Default: <EM
>By default internal routines for 
		determining the disk capacity and remaining space will be used.
		</EM
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>dfree command = /usr/local/samba/bin/dfree
		</B
></P
><P
>Where the script dfree (which must be made executable) could be:</P
><P
><TABLE
BORDER="0"
BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
WIDTH="90%"
><TR
><TD
><PRE
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
> 
		#!/bin/sh
		df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}'
		</PRE
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
></P
><P
>or perhaps (on Sys V based systems):</P
><P
><TABLE
BORDER="0"
BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
WIDTH="90%"
><TR
><TD
><PRE
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
> 
		#!/bin/sh
		/usr/bin/df -k $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $3" "$5}'
		</PRE
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
></P
><P
>Note that you may have to replace the command names 
		with full path names on some systems.</P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="DIRECTORY"
></A
>directory (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>Synonym for <A
HREF="#PATH"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>path
		</I
></TT
></A
>.</P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="DIRECTORYMASK"
></A
>directory mask (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter is the octal modes which are 
		used when converting DOS modes to UNIX modes when creating UNIX 
		directories.</P
><P
>When a directory is created, the necessary permissions are 
		calculated according to the mapping from DOS modes to UNIX permissions, 
		and the resulting UNIX mode is then bit-wise 'AND'ed with this 
		parameter. This parameter may be thought of as a bit-wise MASK for 
		the UNIX modes of a directory. Any bit <EM
>not</EM
> set 
		here will be removed from the modes set on a directory when it is 
		created.</P
><P
>The default value of this parameter removes the 'group' 
		and 'other' write bits from the UNIX mode, allowing only the 
		user who owns the directory to modify it.</P
><P
>Following this Samba will bit-wise 'OR' the UNIX mode 
		created from this parameter with the value of the <A
HREF="#FORCEDIRECTORYMODE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>force directory mode
		</I
></TT
></A
> parameter. This parameter is set to 000 by 
		default (i.e. no extra mode bits are added).</P
><P
>Note that this parameter does not apply to permissions
		set by Windows NT/2000 ACL editors. If the administrator wishes to enforce
		a mask on access control lists also, they need to set the <A
HREF="#DIRECTORYSECURITYMASK"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>directory security mask</I
></TT
></A
>.</P
><P
>See the <A
HREF="#FORCEDIRECTORYMODE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>force 
		directory mode</I
></TT
></A
> parameter to cause particular mode 
		bits to always be set on created directories.</P
><P
>See also the <A
HREF="#CREATEMODE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>create mode
		</I
></TT
></A
> parameter for masking mode bits on created files, 
		and the <A
HREF="#DIRECTORYSECURITYMASK"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>directory 
		security mask</I
></TT
></A
> parameter.</P
><P
>Also refer to the <A
HREF="#INHERITPERMISSIONS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		inherit permissions</I
></TT
></A
> parameter.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>directory mask = 0755</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>directory mask = 0775</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="DIRECTORYMODE"
></A
>directory mode (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>Synonym for <A
HREF="#DIRECTORYMASK"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		directory mask</I
></TT
></A
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="DIRECTORYSECURITYMASK"
></A
>directory security mask (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter controls what UNIX permission bits 
		can be modified when a Windows NT client is manipulating the UNIX 
		permission on a directory using the native NT security dialog 
		box.</P
><P
>This parameter is applied as a mask (AND'ed with) to 
		the changed permission bits, thus preventing any bits not in 
		this mask from being modified. Essentially, zero bits in this 
		mask may be treated as a set of bits the user is not allowed 
		to change.</P
><P
>If not set explicitly this parameter is set to 0777
		meaning a user is allowed to modify all the user/group/world
		permissions on a directory.</P
><P
><EM
>Note</EM
> that users who can access the 
		Samba server through other means can easily bypass this restriction, 
		so it is primarily useful for standalone "appliance" systems.  
		Administrators of most normal systems will probably want to leave
		it as the default of <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>0777</TT
>.</P
><P
>See also the <A
HREF="#FORCEDIRECTORYSECURITYMODE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		force directory security mode</I
></TT
></A
>, <A
HREF="#SECURITYMASK"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>security mask</I
></TT
></A
>, 
		<A
HREF="#FORCESECURITYMODE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>force security mode
		</I
></TT
></A
> parameters.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>directory security mask = 0777</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>directory security mask = 0700</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="DISABLESPOOLSS"
></A
>disable spoolss (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>Enabling this parameter will disables Samba's support
		for the SPOOLSS set of MS-RPC's and will yield identical behavior
		as Samba 2.0.x.  Windows NT/2000 clients will downgrade to using
		Lanman style printing commands. Windows 9x/ME will be uneffected by
		the parameter. However, this will also disable the ability to upload
		printer drivers to a Samba server via the Windows NT Add Printer
		Wizard or by using the NT printer properties dialog window.  It will
		also disable the capability of Windows NT/2000 clients to download
		print drivers from the Samba host upon demand.
		<EM
>Be very careful about enabling this parameter.</EM
>
		</P
><P
>See also <A
HREF="#USECLIENTDRIVER"
>use client driver</A
>
		</P
><P
>Default : <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>disable spoolss = no</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="DNSPROXY"
></A
>dns proxy (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>Specifies that <A
HREF="nmbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>nmbd(8)</A
> 
		when acting as a WINS server and finding that a NetBIOS name has not 
		been registered, should treat the NetBIOS name word-for-word as a DNS 
		name and do a lookup with the DNS server for that name on behalf of 
		the name-querying client.</P
><P
>Note that the maximum length for a NetBIOS name is 15 
		characters, so the DNS name (or DNS alias) can likewise only be 
		15 characters, maximum.</P
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>nmbd</B
> spawns a second copy of itself to do the
		DNS name lookup requests, as doing a name lookup is a blocking 
		action.</P
><P
>See also the parameter <A
HREF="#WINSSUPPORT"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		wins support</I
></TT
></A
>.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>dns proxy = yes</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="DOMAINADMINGROUP"
></A
>domain admin group (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter is intended as a temporary solution
		to enable users to be a member of the "Domain Admins" group when 
		a Samba host is acting as a PDC.  A complete solution will be provided
		by a system for mapping Windows NT/2000 groups onto UNIX groups.
		Please note that this parameter has a somewhat confusing name.  It 
		accepts a list of usernames and of group names in standard 
		<TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>smb.conf</TT
>	notation.
		</P
><P
>See also <A
HREF="#DOMAINGUESTGROUP"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>domain
		guest group</I
></TT
></A
>, <A
HREF="#DOMAINLOGONS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>domain
		logons</I
></TT
></A
>
		</P
><P
>Default: <EM
>no domain administrators</EM
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>domain admin group = root @wheel</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="DOMAINGUESTGROUP"
></A
>domain guest group (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter is intended as a temporary solution
		to enable users to be a member of the "Domain Guests" group when 
		a Samba host is acting as a PDC.  A complete solution will be provided
		by a system for mapping Windows NT/2000 groups onto UNIX groups.
		Please note that this parameter has a somewhat confusing name.  It 
		accepts a list of usernames and of group names in standard 
		<TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>smb.conf</TT
>	notation.
		</P
><P
>See also <A
HREF="#DOMAINADMINGROUP"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>domain
		admin group</I
></TT
></A
>, <A
HREF="#DOMAINLOGONS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>domain
		logons</I
></TT
></A
>
		</P
><P
>Default: <EM
>no domain guests</EM
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>domain guest group = nobody @guest</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="DOMAINLOGONS"
></A
>domain logons (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>If set to <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>yes</TT
>, the Samba server will serve 
		Windows 95/98 Domain logons for the <A
HREF="#WORKGROUP"
>		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>workgroup</I
></TT
></A
> it is in. Samba 2.2 also 
		has limited capability to act as a domain controller for Windows 
		NT 4 Domains.  For more details on setting up this feature see 
		the Samba-PDC-HOWTO included in the <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>htmldocs/</TT
>
		directory shipped with the source code.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>domain logons = no</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="DOMAINMASTER"
></A
>domain master (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>Tell <A
HREF="nmbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>		nmbd(8)</B
></A
> to enable WAN-wide browse list
		collation. Setting this option causes <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>nmbd</B
> to
		claim a special domain specific NetBIOS name that identifies 
		it as a domain master browser for its given <A
HREF="#WORKGROUP"
>		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>workgroup</I
></TT
></A
>. Local master browsers 
		in the same <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>workgroup</I
></TT
> on broadcast-isolated 
		subnets will give this <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>nmbd</B
> their local browse lists, 
		and then ask <A
HREF="smbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbd(8)</B
></A
> 
		for a complete copy of the browse list for the whole wide area 
		network.  Browser clients will then contact their local master browser, 
		and will receive the domain-wide browse list, instead of just the list 
		for their broadcast-isolated subnet.</P
><P
>Note that Windows NT Primary Domain Controllers expect to be 
		able to claim this <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>workgroup</I
></TT
> specific special 
		NetBIOS name that identifies them as domain master browsers for 
		that <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>workgroup</I
></TT
> by default (i.e. there is no 
		way to prevent a Windows NT PDC from attempting to do this). This 
		means that if this parameter is set and <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>nmbd</B
> claims 
		the special name for a <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>workgroup</I
></TT
> before a Windows 
		NT PDC is able to do so then cross subnet browsing will behave 
		strangely and may fail.</P
><P
>If <A
HREF="#DOMAINLOGONS"
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>domain logons = yes</B
>
		</A
>, then the default behavior is to enable the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>domain 
		master</I
></TT
> parameter.  If <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>domain logons</I
></TT
> is 
		not enabled (the default setting), then neither will <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>domain 
		master</I
></TT
> be enabled by default.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>domain master = auto</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="DONTDESCEND"
></A
>dont descend (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>There are certain directories on some systems 
		(e.g., the <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>/proc</TT
> tree under Linux) that are either not 
		of interest to clients or are infinitely deep (recursive). This 
		parameter allows you to specify a comma-delimited list of directories 
		that the server should always show as empty.</P
><P
>Note that Samba can be very fussy about the exact format 
		of the "dont descend" entries. For example you may need <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>		./proc</TT
> instead of just <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>/proc</TT
>. 
		Experimentation is the best policy :-)  </P
><P
>Default: <EM
>none (i.e., all directories are OK 
		to descend)</EM
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>dont descend = /proc,/dev</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="DOSFILEMODE"
></A
>dos filemode (S)</DT
><DD
><P
> The default behavior in Samba is to provide 
		UNIX-like behavior where only the owner of a file/directory is 
		able to change the permissions on it.  However, this behavior
		is often confusing to  DOS/Windows users.  Enabling this parameter 
		allows a user who has write access to the file (by whatever 
		means) to modify the permissions on it.  Note that a user
		belonging to the group owning the file will not be allowed to
		change permissions if the group is only granted read access.
		Ownership of the file/directory is not changed, only the permissions 
		are modified.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>dos filemode = no</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="DOSFILETIMERESOLUTION"
></A
>dos filetime resolution (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>Under the DOS and Windows FAT filesystem, the finest 
		granularity on time resolution is two seconds. Setting this parameter 
		for a share causes Samba to round the reported time down to the 
		nearest two second boundary when a query call that requires one second 
		resolution is made to <A
HREF="smbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbd(8)</B
>
		</A
>.</P
><P
>This option is mainly used as a compatibility option for Visual 
		C++ when used against Samba shares. If oplocks are enabled on a 
		share, Visual C++ uses two different time reading calls to check if a 
		file has changed since it was last read. One of these calls uses a
		one-second granularity, the other uses a two second granularity. As
		the two second call rounds any odd second down, then if the file has a
		timestamp of an odd number of seconds then the two timestamps will not
		match and Visual C++ will keep reporting the file has changed. Setting
		this option causes the two timestamps to match, and Visual C++ is
		happy.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>dos filetime resolution = no</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="DOSFILETIMES"
></A
>dos filetimes (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>Under DOS and Windows, if a user can write to a 
		file they can change the timestamp on it. Under POSIX semantics, 
		only the owner of the file or root may change the timestamp. By 
		default, Samba runs with POSIX semantics and refuses to change the 
		timestamp on a file if the user <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbd</B
> is acting 
		on behalf of is not the file owner. Setting this option to <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>		yes</TT
> allows DOS semantics and <A
HREF="smbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>smbd</A
> will change the file 
		timestamp as DOS requires.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>dos filetimes = no</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="ENCRYPTPASSWORDS"
></A
>encrypt passwords (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This boolean controls whether encrypted passwords 
		will be negotiated with the client. Note that Windows NT 4.0 SP3 and 
		above and also Windows 98 will by default expect encrypted passwords 
		unless a registry entry is changed. To use encrypted passwords in 
		Samba see the file ENCRYPTION.txt in the Samba documentation 
		directory <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>docs/</TT
> shipped with the source code.</P
><P
>In order for encrypted passwords to work correctly
		<A
HREF="smbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbd(8)</B
></A
> must either 
		have access to a local <A
HREF="smbpasswd.5.html"
TARGET="_top"
><TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>smbpasswd(5)
		</TT
></A
> file (see the <A
HREF="smbpasswd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>		smbpasswd(8)</B
></A
> program for information on how to set up 
 		and maintain this file), or set the <A
HREF="#SECURITY"
>security = [server|domain]</A
> parameter which 
		causes <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbd</B
> to authenticate against another 
		server.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>encrypt passwords = no</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="ENHANCEDBROWSING"
></A
>enhanced browsing (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This option enables a couple of enhancements to 
		cross-subnet browse propagation that have been added in Samba 
		but which are not standard in Microsoft implementations.  
		</P
><P
>The first enhancement to browse propagation consists of a regular
		wildcard query to a Samba WINS server for all Domain Master Browsers,
		followed by a browse synchronization with each of the returned
		DMBs. The second enhancement consists of a regular randomised browse
		synchronization with all currently known DMBs.</P
><P
>You may wish to disable this option if you have a problem with empty
		workgroups not disappearing from browse lists. Due to the restrictions
		of the browse protocols these enhancements can cause a empty workgroup
		to stay around forever which can be annoying.</P
><P
>In general you should leave this option enabled as it makes
		cross-subnet browse propagation much more reliable.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>enhanced browsing = yes</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="ENUMPORTSCOMMAND"
></A
>enumports command (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>The concept of a "port" is fairly foreign
		to UNIX hosts.  Under Windows NT/2000 print servers, a port
		is associated with a port monitor and generally takes the form of
		a local port (i.e. LPT1:, COM1:, FILE:) or a remote port
		(i.e. LPD Port Monitor, etc...).  By default, Samba has only one
		port defined--<TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>"Samba Printer Port"</TT
>.  Under 
		Windows NT/2000, all printers must have a valid port name.  
		If you wish to have a list of ports displayed (<B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbd
		</B
> does not use a port name for anything) other than 
		the default <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>"Samba Printer Port"</TT
>, you 
		can define <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>enumports command</I
></TT
> to point to
		a program which should generate a list of ports, one per line,
		to standard output.  This listing will then be used in response
		to the level 1 and 2 EnumPorts() RPC.</P
><P
>Default: <EM
>no enumports command</EM
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>enumports command = /usr/bin/listports
		</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="EXEC"
></A
>exec (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This is a synonym for <A
HREF="#PREEXEC"
>		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>preexec</I
></TT
></A
>.</P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="FAKEDIRECTORYCREATETIMES"
></A
>fake directory create times (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>NTFS and Windows VFAT file systems keep a create 
		time for all files and directories. This is not the same as the 
		ctime - status change time - that Unix keeps, so Samba by default 
		reports the earliest of the various times Unix does keep. Setting 
		this parameter for a share causes Samba to always report midnight 
		1-1-1980 as the create time for directories.</P
><P
>This option is mainly used as a compatibility option for 
		Visual C++ when used against Samba shares. Visual C++ generated 
		makefiles have the object directory as a dependency for each object 
		file, and a make rule to create the directory. Also, when NMAKE 
		compares timestamps it uses the creation time when examining a 
		directory. Thus the object directory will be created if it does not 
		exist, but once it does exist it will always have an earlier 
		timestamp than the object files it contains.</P
><P
>However, Unix time semantics mean that the create time 
		reported by Samba will be updated whenever a file is created or 
		or deleted in the directory.  NMAKE finds all object files in 
		the object directory.  The timestamp of the last one built is then 
		compared to the timestamp of the object directory.  If the 
		directory's timestamp if newer, then all object files
		will be rebuilt.  Enabling this option 
		ensures directories always predate their contents and an NMAKE build 
		will proceed as expected.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>fake directory create times = no</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="FAKEOPLOCKS"
></A
>fake oplocks (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>Oplocks are the way that SMB clients get permission 
		from a server to locally cache file operations. If a server grants 
		an oplock (opportunistic lock) then the client is free to assume 
		that it is the only one accessing the file and it will aggressively 
		cache file data. With some oplock types the client may even cache 
		file open/close operations. This can give enormous performance benefits.
		</P
><P
>When you set <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>fake oplocks = yes</B
>, <A
HREF="smbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbd(8)</B
></A
> will
		always grant oplock requests no matter how many clients are using 
		the file.</P
><P
>It is generally much better to use the real <A
HREF="#OPLOCKS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>oplocks</I
></TT
></A
> support rather 
		than this parameter.</P
><P
>If you enable this option on all read-only shares or 
		shares that you know will only be accessed from one client at a 
		time such as physically read-only media like CDROMs, you will see 
		a big performance improvement on many operations. If you enable 
		this option on shares where multiple clients may be accessing the 
		files read-write at the same time you can get data corruption. Use 
		this option carefully!</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>fake oplocks = no</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="FOLLOWSYMLINKS"
></A
>follow symlinks (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter allows the Samba administrator 
		to stop <A
HREF="smbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbd(8)</B
></A
> 
		from following symbolic links in a particular share. Setting this 
		parameter to <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>no</TT
> prevents any file or directory 
		that is a symbolic link from being followed (the user will get an 
		error).  This option is very useful to stop users from adding a 
		symbolic link to <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>/etc/passwd</TT
> in their home 
		directory for instance.  However it will slow filename lookups 
		down slightly.</P
><P
>This option is enabled (i.e. <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbd</B
> will 
		follow symbolic links) by default.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>follow symlinks = yes</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="FORCECREATEMODE"
></A
>force create mode (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter specifies a set of UNIX mode bit 
		permissions that will <EM
>always</EM
> be set on a 
		file created by Samba. This is done by bitwise 'OR'ing these bits onto 
		the mode bits of a file that is being created or having its 
		permissions changed. The default for this parameter is (in octal) 
		000. The modes in this parameter are bitwise 'OR'ed onto the file 
		mode after the mask set in the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>create mask</I
></TT
> 
		parameter is applied.</P
><P
>See also the parameter <A
HREF="#CREATEMASK"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>create 
		mask</I
></TT
></A
> for details on masking mode bits on files.</P
><P
>See also the <A
HREF="#INHERITPERMISSIONS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>inherit 
		permissions</I
></TT
></A
> parameter.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>force create mode = 000</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>force create mode = 0755</B
></P
><P
>would force all created files to have read and execute 
		permissions set for 'group' and 'other' as well as the 
		read/write/execute bits set for the 'user'.</P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="FORCEDIRECTORYMODE"
></A
>force directory mode (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter specifies a set of UNIX mode bit 
		permissions that will <EM
>always</EM
> be set on a directory 
		created by Samba. This is done by bitwise 'OR'ing these bits onto the 
		mode bits of a directory that is being created. The default for this 
		parameter is (in octal) 0000 which will not add any extra permission 
		bits to a created directory. This operation is done after the mode 
		mask in the parameter <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>directory mask</I
></TT
> is 
		applied.</P
><P
>See also the parameter <A
HREF="#DIRECTORYMASK"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		directory mask</I
></TT
></A
> for details on masking mode bits 
		on created directories.</P
><P
>See also the <A
HREF="#INHERITPERMISSIONS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		inherit permissions</I
></TT
></A
> parameter.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>force directory mode = 000</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>force directory mode = 0755</B
></P
><P
>would force all created directories to have read and execute
		permissions set for 'group' and 'other' as well as the
		read/write/execute bits set for the 'user'.</P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="FORCEDIRECTORYSECURITYMODE"
></A
>force directory 
		security mode (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter controls what UNIX permission bits 
		can be modified when a Windows NT client is manipulating the UNIX 
		permission on a directory using the native NT security dialog box.</P
><P
>This parameter is applied as a mask (OR'ed with) to the 
		changed permission bits, thus forcing any bits in this mask that 
		the user may have modified to be on. Essentially, one bits in this 
		mask may be treated as a set of bits that, when modifying security 
		on a directory, the user has always set to be 'on'.</P
><P
>If not set explicitly this parameter is 000, which 
		allows a user to modify all the user/group/world permissions on a 
		directory without restrictions.</P
><P
><EM
>Note</EM
> that users who can access the 
		Samba server through other means can easily bypass this restriction, 
		so it is primarily useful for standalone "appliance" systems.  
		Administrators of most normal systems will probably want to leave
		it set as 0000.</P
><P
>See also the <A
HREF="#DIRECTORYSECURITYMASK"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		directory security mask</I
></TT
></A
>, <A
HREF="#SECURITYMASK"
>		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>security mask</I
></TT
></A
>, 
		<A
HREF="#FORCESECURITYMODE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>force security mode
		</I
></TT
></A
> parameters.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>force directory security mode = 0</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>force directory security mode = 700</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="FORCEGROUP"
></A
>force group (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This specifies a UNIX group name that will be 
		assigned as the default primary group for all users connecting 
		to this service. This is useful for sharing files by ensuring 
		that all access to files on service will use the named group for 
		their permissions checking. Thus, by assigning permissions for this 
		group to the files and directories within this service the Samba 
		administrator can restrict or allow sharing of these files.</P
><P
>In Samba 2.0.5 and above this parameter has extended 
		functionality in the following way. If the group name listed here 
		has a '+' character prepended to it then the current user accessing 
		the share only has the primary group default assigned to this group 
		if they are already assigned as a member of that group. This allows 
		an administrator to decide that only users who are already in a 
		particular group will create files with group ownership set to that 
		group. This gives a finer granularity of ownership assignment. For 
		example, the setting <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>force group = +sys</TT
> means 
		that only users who are already in group sys will have their default
		primary group assigned to sys when accessing this Samba share. All
		other users will retain their ordinary primary group.</P
><P
>If the <A
HREF="#FORCEUSER"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>force user
		</I
></TT
></A
> parameter is also set the group specified in 
		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>force group</I
></TT
> will override the primary group
		set in <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>force user</I
></TT
>.</P
><P
>See also <A
HREF="#FORCEUSER"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>force 
		user</I
></TT
></A
>.</P
><P
>Default: <EM
>no forced group</EM
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>force group = agroup</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="FORCESECURITYMODE"
></A
>force security mode (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter controls what UNIX permission 
		bits can be modified when a Windows NT client is manipulating 
		the UNIX permission on a file using the native NT security dialog 
		box.</P
><P
>This parameter is applied as a mask (OR'ed with) to the 
		changed permission bits, thus forcing any bits in this mask that 
		the user may have modified to be on. Essentially, one bits in this 
		mask may be treated as a set of bits that, when modifying security 
		on a file, the user has always set to be 'on'.</P
><P
>If not set explicitly this parameter is set to 0,
		and allows a user to modify all the user/group/world permissions on a file,
		with no restrictions.</P
><P
><EM
>Note</EM
> that users who can access 
		the Samba server through other means can easily bypass this restriction, 
		so it is primarily useful for standalone "appliance" systems.  
		Administrators of most normal systems will probably want to leave
		this set to 0000.</P
><P
>See also the <A
HREF="#FORCEDIRECTORYSECURITYMODE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		force directory security mode</I
></TT
></A
>,
		<A
HREF="#DIRECTORYSECURITYMASK"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>directory security
		mask</I
></TT
></A
>, <A
HREF="#SECURITYMASK"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		security mask</I
></TT
></A
> parameters.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>force security mode = 0</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>force security mode = 700</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="FORCEUNKNOWNACLUSER"
></A
>force unknown acl user (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>If this parameter is set, a Windows NT ACL that contains
		an unknown SID (security descriptor, or representation of a user or group id)
		as the owner or group owner of the file will be silently mapped into the
		current UNIX uid or gid of the currently connected user.</P
><P
>This is designed to allow Windows NT clients to copy files and
		folders containing ACLs that were created locally on the client machine
		and contain users local to that machine only (no domain users) to be
		copied to a Samba server (usually with XCOPY /O) and have the unknown
		userid and groupid of the file owner map to the current connected user.
		This can only be fixed correctly when winbindd allows arbitrary mapping
		from any Windows NT SID to a UNIX uid or gid.</P
><P
>Try using this parameter when XCOPY /O gives an ACCESS_DENIED error.
		</P
><P
>See also <A
HREF="#FORCEGROUP"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>force group
		</I
></TT
></A
></P
><P
>Default: <EM
>False</EM
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>force unknown acl user = yes</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="FORCEUSER"
></A
>force user (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This specifies a UNIX user name that will be 
		assigned as the default user for all users connecting to this service. 
		This is useful for sharing files. You should also use it carefully 
		as using it incorrectly can cause security problems.</P
><P
>This user name only gets used once a connection is established. 
		Thus clients still need to connect as a valid user and supply a 
		valid password. Once connected, all file operations will be performed 
		as the "forced user", no matter what username the client connected 
		as.  This can be very useful.</P
><P
>In Samba 2.0.5 and above this parameter also causes the 
		primary group of the forced user to be used as the primary group 
		for all file activity. Prior to 2.0.5 the primary group was left 
		as the primary group of the connecting user (this was a bug).</P
><P
>See also <A
HREF="#FORCEGROUP"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>force group
		</I
></TT
></A
></P
><P
>Default: <EM
>no forced user</EM
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>force user = auser</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="FSTYPE"
></A
>fstype (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter allows the administrator to 
		configure the string that specifies the type of filesystem a share 
		is using that is reported by <A
HREF="smbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbd(8)
		</B
></A
> when a client queries the filesystem type
		for a share. The default type is <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>NTFS</TT
> for 
		compatibility with Windows NT but this can be changed to other 
		strings such as <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>Samba</TT
> or <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>FAT
		</TT
> if required.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>fstype = NTFS</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>fstype = Samba</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="GETWDCACHE"
></A
>getwd cache (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This is a tuning option. When this is enabled a 
		caching algorithm will be used to reduce the time taken for getwd() 
		calls. This can have a significant impact on performance, especially 
		when the <A
HREF="#WIDELINKS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>wide links</I
></TT
>
		</A
>parameter is set to <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>no</TT
>.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>getwd cache = yes</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="GROUP"
></A
>group (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>Synonym for <A
HREF="#FORCEGROUP"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>force 
		group</I
></TT
></A
>.</P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="GUESTACCOUNT"
></A
>guest account (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This is a username which will be used for access 
		to services which are specified as <A
HREF="#GUESTOK"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		guest ok</I
></TT
></A
> (see below). Whatever privileges this 
		user has will be available to any client connecting to the guest service. 
		Typically this user will exist in the password file, but will not
		have a valid login. The user account "ftp" is often a good choice 
		for this parameter. If a username is specified in a given service, 
		the specified username overrides this one.</P
><P
>One some systems the default guest account "nobody" may not 
		be able to print. Use another account in this case. You should test 
		this by trying to log in as your guest user (perhaps by using the 
		<B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>su -</B
> command) and trying to print using the 
		system print command such as <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>lpr(1)</B
> or <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>		lp(1)</B
>.</P
><P
>Default: <EM
>specified at compile time, usually 
		"nobody"</EM
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>guest account = ftp</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="GUESTOK"
></A
>guest ok (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>If this parameter is <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>yes</TT
> for 
		a service, then no password is required to connect to the service. 
		Privileges will be those of the <A
HREF="#GUESTACCOUNT"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		guest account</I
></TT
></A
>.</P
><P
>See the section below on <A
HREF="#SECURITY"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		security</I
></TT
></A
> for more information about this option.
		</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>guest ok = no</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="GUESTONLY"
></A
>guest only (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>If this parameter is <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>yes</TT
> for 
		a service, then only guest connections to the service are permitted. 
		This parameter will have no effect if <A
HREF="#GUESTOK"
>		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>guest ok</I
></TT
></A
> is not set for the service.</P
><P
>See the section below on <A
HREF="#SECURITY"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		security</I
></TT
></A
> for more information about this option.
		</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>guest only = no</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="HIDEDOTFILES"
></A
>hide dot files (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This is a boolean parameter that controls whether 
		files starting with a dot appear as hidden files.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>hide dot files = yes</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="HIDEFILES"
></A
>hide files(S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This is a list of files or directories that are not 
		visible but are accessible.  The DOS 'hidden' attribute is applied 
		to any files or directories that match.</P
><P
>Each entry in the list must be separated by a '/', 
		which allows spaces to be included in the entry.  '*'
		and '?' can be used to specify multiple files or directories 
		as in DOS wildcards.</P
><P
>Each entry must be a Unix path, not a DOS path and must 
		not include the Unix directory separator '/'.</P
><P
>Note that the case sensitivity option is applicable 
		in hiding files.</P
><P
>Setting this parameter will affect the performance of Samba, 
		as it will be forced to check all files and directories for a match 
		as they are scanned.</P
><P
>See also <A
HREF="#HIDEDOTFILES"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>hide 
		dot files</I
></TT
></A
>, <A
HREF="#VETOFILES"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		veto files</I
></TT
></A
> and <A
HREF="#CASESENSITIVE"
>		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>case sensitive</I
></TT
></A
>.</P
><P
>Default: <EM
>no file are hidden</EM
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>hide files =
		/.*/DesktopFolderDB/TrashFor%m/resource.frk/</B
></P
><P
>The above example is based on files that the Macintosh 
		SMB client (DAVE) available from <A
HREF="http://www.thursby.com"
TARGET="_top"
> 
		Thursby</A
> creates for internal use, and also still hides 
		all files beginning with a dot.</P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="HIDELOCALUSERS"
></A
>hide local users(G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter toggles the hiding of local UNIX 
		users (root, wheel, floppy, etc) from remote clients.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>hide local users = no</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="HIDEUNREADABLE"
></A
>hide unreadable (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter prevents clients from seeing the
		existance of files that cannot be read. Defaults to off.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>hide unreadable = no</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="HOMEDIRMAP"
></A
>homedir map (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>If<A
HREF="#NISHOMEDIR"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>nis homedir
		</I
></TT
></A
> is <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>yes</TT
>, and <A
HREF="smbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbd(8)</B
></A
> is also acting 
		as a Win95/98 <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>logon server</I
></TT
> then this parameter 
		specifies the NIS (or YP) map from which the server for the user's 
		home directory should be extracted.  At present, only the Sun 
		auto.home map format is understood. The form of the map is:</P
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>username	server:/some/file/system</B
></P
><P
>and the program will extract the servername from before 
		the first ':'.  There should probably be a better parsing system 
		that copes with different map formats and also Amd (another 
		automounter) maps.</P
><P
><EM
>NOTE :</EM
>A working NIS client is required on 
		the system for this option to work.</P
><P
>See also <A
HREF="#NISHOMEDIR"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>nis homedir</I
></TT
>
		</A
>, <A
HREF="#DOMAINLOGONS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>domain logons</I
></TT
>
		</A
>.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>homedir map = &#60;empty string&#62;</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>homedir map = amd.homedir</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="HOSTMSDFS"
></A
>host msdfs (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This boolean parameter is only available 
		if Samba has been configured and compiled with the <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>		--with-msdfs</B
> option. If set to <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>yes</TT
>, 
		Samba will act as a Dfs server, and  allow Dfs-aware clients 
		to browse Dfs trees hosted on the server.</P
><P
>See also the <A
HREF="#MSDFSROOT"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		msdfs root</I
></TT
></A
> share  level  parameter.  For
		more  information  on  setting  up a Dfs tree on Samba,
		refer to <A
HREF="msdfs_setup.html"
TARGET="_top"
>msdfs_setup.html</A
>.
		</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>host msdfs = no</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="HOSTSALLOW"
></A
>hosts allow (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>A synonym for this parameter is <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>allow 
		hosts</I
></TT
>.</P
><P
>This parameter is a comma, space, or tab delimited 
		set of hosts which are permitted to access a service.</P
><P
>If specified in the [global] section then it will
		apply to all services, regardless of whether the individual 
		service has a different setting.</P
><P
>You can specify the hosts by name or IP number. For 
		example, you could restrict access to only the hosts on a 
		Class C subnet with something like <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>allow hosts = 150.203.5.
		</B
>. The full syntax of the list is described in the man 
		page <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>hosts_access(5)</TT
>. Note that this man
		page may not be present on your system, so a brief description will
		be given here also.</P
><P
>Note that the localhost address 127.0.0.1 will always 
		be allowed access unless specifically denied by a <A
HREF="#HOSTSDENY"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>hosts deny</I
></TT
></A
> option.</P
><P
>You can also specify hosts by network/netmask pairs and 
		by netgroup names if your system supports netgroups. The 
		<EM
>EXCEPT</EM
> keyword can also be used to limit a 
		wildcard list. The following examples may provide some help:</P
><P
>Example 1: allow all IPs in 150.203.*.*; except one</P
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>hosts allow = 150.203. EXCEPT 150.203.6.66</B
></P
><P
>Example 2: allow hosts that match the given network/netmask</P
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>hosts allow = 150.203.15.0/255.255.255.0</B
></P
><P
>Example 3: allow a couple of hosts</P
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>hosts allow = lapland, arvidsjaur</B
></P
><P
>Example 4: allow only hosts in NIS netgroup "foonet", but 
		deny access from one particular host</P
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>hosts allow = @foonet</B
></P
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>hosts deny = pirate</B
></P
><P
>Note that access still requires suitable user-level passwords.</P
><P
>See <A
HREF="testparm.1.html"
TARGET="_top"
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>testparm(1)</B
>
		</A
> for a way of testing your host access to see if it does 
		what you expect.</P
><P
>Default: <EM
>none (i.e., all hosts permitted access)
		</EM
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>allow hosts = 150.203.5. myhost.mynet.edu.au
		</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="HOSTSDENY"
></A
>hosts deny (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>The opposite of <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>hosts allow</I
></TT
> 
		- hosts listed here are <EM
>NOT</EM
> permitted access to 
		services unless the specific services have their own lists to override 
		this one. Where the lists conflict, the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>allow</I
></TT
> 
		list takes precedence.</P
><P
>Default: <EM
>none (i.e., no hosts specifically excluded)
		</EM
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>hosts deny = 150.203.4. badhost.mynet.edu.au
		</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="HOSTSEQUIV"
></A
>hosts equiv (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>If this global parameter is a non-null string, 
		it specifies the name of a file to read for the names of hosts 
		and users who will be allowed access without specifying a password.
		</P
><P
>This is not be confused with <A
HREF="#HOSTSALLOW"
>		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>hosts allow</I
></TT
></A
> which is about hosts 
		access to services and is more useful for guest services. <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		hosts equiv</I
></TT
> may be useful for NT clients which will 
		not supply passwords to Samba.</P
><P
><EM
>NOTE :</EM
> The use of <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>hosts equiv
		</I
></TT
> can be a major security hole. This is because you are 
		trusting the PC to supply the correct username. It is very easy to 
		get a PC to supply a false username. I recommend that the 
		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>hosts equiv</I
></TT
> option be only used if you really 
		know what you are doing, or perhaps on a home network where you trust 
		your spouse and kids. And only if you <EM
>really</EM
> trust 
		them :-).</P
><P
>Default: <EM
>no host equivalences</EM
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>hosts equiv = /etc/hosts.equiv</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="INCLUDE"
></A
>include (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This allows you to include one config file 
		inside another.  The file is included literally, as though typed 
		in place.</P
><P
>It takes the standard substitutions, except <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>%u
		</I
></TT
>, <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>%P</I
></TT
> and <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>%S</I
></TT
>.
		</P
><P
>Default: <EM
>no file included</EM
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>include = /usr/local/samba/lib/admin_smb.conf
		</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="INHERITACLS"
></A
>inherit acls (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter can be used to ensure
		that if default acls exist on parent directories,
		they are always honored when creating a subdirectory.
		The default behavior is to use the mode specified
		when creating the directory.  Enabling this option
		sets the mode to 0777, thus guaranteeing that 
		default directory acls are propagated.
		</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>inherit acls = no</B
>
		</P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="INHERITPERMISSIONS"
></A
>inherit permissions (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>The permissions on new files and directories 
		are normally governed by <A
HREF="#CREATEMASK"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		create mask</I
></TT
></A
>, <A
HREF="#DIRECTORYMASK"
>		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>directory mask</I
></TT
></A
>, <A
HREF="#FORCECREATEMODE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>force create mode</I
></TT
>
		</A
> and <A
HREF="#FORCEDIRECTORYMODE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>force 
		directory mode</I
></TT
></A
> but the boolean inherit 
		permissions parameter overrides this.</P
><P
>New directories inherit the mode of the parent directory,
		including bits such as setgid.</P
><P
>New files inherit their read/write bits from the parent 
		directory.  Their execute bits continue to be determined by
		<A
HREF="#MAPARCHIVE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>map archive</I
></TT
>
		</A
>, <A
HREF="#MAPHIDDEN"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>map hidden</I
></TT
>
		</A
> and <A
HREF="#MAPSYSTEM"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>map system</I
></TT
>
		</A
> as usual.</P
><P
>Note that the setuid bit is <EM
>never</EM
> set via 
		inheritance (the code explicitly prohibits this).</P
><P
>This can be particularly useful on large systems with 
		many users, perhaps several thousand, to allow a single [homes] 
		share to be used flexibly by each user.</P
><P
>See also <A
HREF="#CREATEMASK"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>create mask
		</I
></TT
></A
>, <A
HREF="#DIRECTORYMASK"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		directory mask</I
></TT
></A
>, <A
HREF="#FORCECREATEMODE"
>		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>force create mode</I
></TT
></A
> and <A
HREF="#FORCEDIRECTORYMODE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>force directory mode</I
></TT
>
		</A
>.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>inherit permissions = no</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="INTERFACES"
></A
>interfaces (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This option allows you to override the default 
		network interfaces list that Samba will use for browsing, name 
		registration and other NBT traffic. By default Samba will query 
		the kernel for the list of all active interfaces and use any 
		interfaces except 127.0.0.1 that are broadcast capable.</P
><P
>The option takes a list of interface strings. Each string 
		can be in any of the following forms:</P
><P
></P
><UL
><LI
><P
>a network interface name (such as eth0). 
			This may include shell-like wildcards so eth* will match 
			any interface starting with the substring "eth"</P
></LI
><LI
><P
>an IP address. In this case the netmask is 
			determined from the list of interfaces obtained from the 
			kernel</P
></LI
><LI
><P
>an IP/mask pair. </P
></LI
><LI
><P
>a broadcast/mask pair.</P
></LI
></UL
><P
>The "mask" parameters can either be a bit length (such 
		as 24 for a C class network) or a full netmask in dotted 
		decimal form.</P
><P
>The "IP" parameters above can either be a full dotted 
		decimal IP address or a hostname which will be looked up via 
		the OS's normal hostname resolution mechanisms.</P
><P
>For example, the following line:</P
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>interfaces = eth0 192.168.2.10/24 192.168.3.10/255.255.255.0
		</B
></P
><P
>would configure three network interfaces corresponding 
		to the eth0 device and IP addresses 192.168.2.10 and 192.168.3.10. 
		The netmasks of the latter two interfaces would be set to 255.255.255.0.</P
><P
>See also <A
HREF="#BINDINTERFACESONLY"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>bind 
		interfaces only</I
></TT
></A
>.</P
><P
>Default: <EM
>all active interfaces except 127.0.0.1 
		that are broadcast capable</EM
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="INVALIDUSERS"
></A
>invalid users (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This is a list of users that should not be allowed 
		to login to this service. This is really a <EM
>paranoid</EM
> 
		check to absolutely ensure an improper setting does not breach 
		your security.</P
><P
>A name starting with a '@' is interpreted as an NIS 
 		netgroup first (if your system supports NIS), and then as a UNIX 
		group if the name was not found in the NIS netgroup database.</P
><P
>A name starting with '+' is interpreted only 
		by looking in the UNIX group database. A name starting with 
		'&#38;' is interpreted only by looking in the NIS netgroup database 
		(this requires NIS to be working on your system). The characters 
		'+' and '&#38;' may be used at the start of the name in either order 
		so the value <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>+&#38;group</I
></TT
> means check the 
		UNIX group database, followed by the NIS netgroup database, and 
		the value <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>&#38;+group</I
></TT
> means check the NIS
		netgroup database, followed by the UNIX group database (the 
		same as the '@' prefix).</P
><P
>The current servicename is substituted for <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>%S</I
></TT
>. 
		This is useful in the [homes] section.</P
><P
>See also <A
HREF="#VALIDUSERS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>valid users
		</I
></TT
></A
>.</P
><P
>Default: <EM
>no invalid users</EM
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>invalid users = root fred admin @wheel
		</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="KEEPALIVE"
></A
>keepalive (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>The value of the parameter (an integer) represents 
		the number of seconds between <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>keepalive</I
></TT
> 
		packets. If this parameter is zero, no keepalive packets will be 
		sent. Keepalive packets, if sent, allow the server to tell whether 
		a client is still present and responding.</P
><P
>Keepalives should, in general, not be needed if the socket 
		being used has the SO_KEEPALIVE attribute set on it (see <A
HREF="#SOCKETOPTIONS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>socket options</I
></TT
></A
>). 
		Basically you should only use this option if you strike difficulties.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>keepalive = 300</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>keepalive = 600</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="KERNELOPLOCKS"
></A
>kernel oplocks (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>For UNIXes that support kernel based <A
HREF="#OPLOCKS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>oplocks</I
></TT
></A
>
		(currently only IRIX and the Linux 2.4 kernel), this parameter 
		allows the use of them to be turned on or off.</P
><P
>Kernel oplocks support allows Samba <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>oplocks
		</I
></TT
> to be broken whenever a local UNIX process or NFS operation 
		accesses a file that <A
HREF="smbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbd(8)</B
>
		</A
> has oplocked. This allows complete data consistency between 
		SMB/CIFS, NFS and local file access (and is a <EM
>very</EM
> 
		cool feature :-).</P
><P
>This parameter defaults to <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>on</TT
>, but is translated
		to a no-op on systems that no not have the necessary kernel support.
		You should never need to touch this parameter.</P
><P
>See also the <A
HREF="#OPLOCKS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>oplocks</I
></TT
>
		</A
> and <A
HREF="#LEVEL2OPLOCKS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>level2 oplocks
		</I
></TT
></A
> parameters.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>kernel oplocks = yes</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="LANMANAUTH"
></A
>lanman auth (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter determines whether or not <A
HREF="smbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>smbd</A
> will
		attempt to authenticate users using the LANMAN password hash.
		If disabled, only clients which support NT password hashes (e.g. Windows 
		NT/2000 clients, smbclient, etc... but not Windows 95/98 or the MS DOS 
		network client) will be able to connect to the Samba host.</P
><P
>Default : <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>lanman auth = yes</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="LARGEREADWRITE"
></A
>large readwrite (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter determines whether or not <A
HREF="smbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>smbd</A
>
		supports the new 64k streaming read and write varient SMB requests introduced
		with Windows 2000. Note that due to Windows 2000 client redirector bugs
		this requires Samba to be running on a 64-bit capable operating system such
		as IRIX, Solaris or a Linux 2.4 kernel. Can improve performance by 10% with
		Windows 2000 clients. Defaults to on. Windows NT 4.0 only supports
		read version of this call, and ignores the write version.
		</P
><P
>Default : <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>large readwrite = yes</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="LDAPADMINDN"
></A
>ldap admin dn (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter is only available if Samba has been
		configure to include the <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>--with-ldapsam</B
> option
		at compile time. This option should be considered experimental and
		under active development.
		</P
><P
>		The <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>ldap admin dn</I
></TT
> defines the Distinguished 
		Name (DN) name used by Samba to contact the <A
HREF="#LDAPSERVER"
>ldap
		server</A
> when retreiving user account information. The <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>ldap
		admin dn</I
></TT
> is used in conjunction with the admin dn password
		stored in the <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>private/secrets.tdb</TT
> file.  See the
		<A
HREF="smbpasswd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbpasswd(8)</B
></A
> man
		page for more information on how to accmplish this.
		</P
><P
>Default : <EM
>none</EM
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="LDAPFILTER"
></A
>ldap filter (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter is only available if Samba has been
		configure to include the <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>--with-ldapsam</B
> option
		at compile time. This option should be considered experimental and
		under active development.
		</P
><P
>		This parameter specifies the RFC 2254 compliant LDAP search filter.
		The default is to match the login name with the <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>uid</TT
> 
		attribute for all entries matching the <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>sambaAccount</TT
>		
		objectclass.  Note that this filter should only return one entry.
		</P
><P
>Default : <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>ldap filter = (&#38;(uid=%u)(objectclass=sambaAccount))</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="LDAPPORT"
></A
>ldap port (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter is only available if Samba has been
		configure to include the <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>--with-ldapsam</B
> option
		at compile time. This option should be considered experimental and
		under active development.
		</P
><P
>		This option is used to control the tcp port number used to contact
		the <A
HREF="#LDAPSERVER"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>ldap server</I
></TT
></A
>.
		The default is to use the stand LDAPS port 636.
		</P
><P
>See Also: <A
HREF="#LDAPSSL"
>ldap ssl</A
>
		</P
><P
>Default : <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>ldap port = 636 ; if ldap ssl = on</B
></P
><P
>Default : <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>ldap port = 389 ; if ldap ssl = off</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="LDAPSERVER"
></A
>ldap server (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter is only available if Samba has been
		configure to include the <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>--with-ldapsam</B
> option
		at compile time. This option should be considered experimental and
		under active development.
		</P
><P
>		This parameter should contains the FQDN of the ldap directory 
		server which should be queried to locate user account information.
		</P
><P
>Default : <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>ldap server = localhost</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="LDAPSSL"
></A
>ldap ssl (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter is only available if Samba has been
		configure to include the <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>--with-ldapsam</B
> option
		at compile time. This option should be considered experimental and
		under active development.
		</P
><P
>		This option is used to define whether or not Samba should
		use SSL when connecting to the <A
HREF="#LDAPSERVER"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>ldap
		server</I
></TT
></A
>.  This is <EM
>NOT</EM
> related to
		Samba SSL support which is enabled by specifying the 
		<B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>--with-ssl</B
> option to the <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>configure</TT
> 
		script (see <A
HREF="#SSL"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>ssl</I
></TT
></A
>).
		</P
><P
>		The <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>ldap ssl</I
></TT
> can be set to one of three values:
		(a) <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>on</TT
> - Always use SSL when contacting the 
		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>ldap	server</I
></TT
>, (b) <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>off</TT
> -
		Never use SSL when querying the directory, or (c) <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>start_tls</TT
> 
		- Use the LDAPv3 StartTLS extended operation 
		(RFC2830) for communicating with the directory server.
		</P
><P
>Default : <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>ldap ssl = on</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="LDAPSUFFIX"
></A
>ldap suffix (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter is only available if Samba has been
		configure to include the <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>--with-ldapsam</B
> option
		at compile time. This option should be considered experimental and
		under active development.
		</P
><P
>Default : <EM
>none</EM
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="LEVEL2OPLOCKS"
></A
>level2 oplocks (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter controls whether Samba supports
		level2 (read-only) oplocks on a share.</P
><P
>Level2, or read-only oplocks allow Windows NT clients 
		that have an oplock on a file to downgrade from a read-write oplock 
		to a read-only oplock once a second client opens the file (instead 
		of releasing all oplocks on a second open, as in traditional, 
		exclusive oplocks). This allows all openers of the file that 
		support level2 oplocks to cache the file for read-ahead only (ie. 
		they may not cache writes or lock requests) and increases performance 
		for many accesses of files that are not commonly written (such as 
		application .EXE files).</P
><P
>Once one of the clients which have a read-only oplock 
		writes to the file all clients are notified (no reply is needed 
		or waited for) and told to break their oplocks to "none" and 
		delete any read-ahead caches.</P
><P
>It is recommended that this parameter be turned on 
		to speed access to shared executables.</P
><P
>For more discussions on level2 oplocks see the CIFS spec.</P
><P
>Currently, if <A
HREF="#KERNELOPLOCKS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>kernel 
		oplocks</I
></TT
></A
> are supported then level2 oplocks are 
		not granted (even if this parameter is set to <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>yes</TT
>). 
		Note also, the <A
HREF="#OPLOCKS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>oplocks</I
></TT
>
		</A
> parameter must be set to <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>yes</TT
> on this share in order for 
		this parameter to have any effect.</P
><P
>See also the <A
HREF="#OPLOCKS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>oplocks</I
></TT
>
		</A
> and <A
HREF="#OPLOCKS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>kernel oplocks</I
></TT
>
		</A
> parameters.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>level2 oplocks = yes</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="LMANNOUNCE"
></A
>lm announce (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter determines if <A
HREF="nmbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>		<B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>nmbd(8)</B
></A
> will produce Lanman announce 
		broadcasts that are needed by OS/2 clients in order for them to see 
		the Samba server in their browse list. This parameter can have three 
		values, <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>yes</TT
>, <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>no</TT
>, or
		<TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>auto</TT
>. The default is <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>auto</TT
>.  
		If set to <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>no</TT
> Samba will never produce these 
		broadcasts. If set to <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>yes</TT
> Samba will produce 
		Lanman announce broadcasts at a frequency set by the parameter 
		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>lm interval</I
></TT
>. If set to <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>auto</TT
> 
		Samba will not send Lanman announce broadcasts by default but will 
		listen for them. If it hears such a broadcast on the wire it will 
		then start sending them at a frequency set by the parameter 
		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>lm interval</I
></TT
>.</P
><P
>See also <A
HREF="#LMINTERVAL"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>lm interval
		</I
></TT
></A
>.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>lm announce = auto</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>lm announce = yes</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="LMINTERVAL"
></A
>lm interval (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>If Samba is set to produce Lanman announce 
		broadcasts needed by OS/2 clients (see the <A
HREF="#LMANNOUNCE"
>		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>lm announce</I
></TT
></A
> parameter) then this 
		parameter defines the frequency in seconds with which they will be 
		made.  If this is set to zero then no Lanman announcements will be 
		made despite the setting of the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>lm announce</I
></TT
> 
		parameter.</P
><P
>See also <A
HREF="#LMANNOUNCE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>lm 
		announce</I
></TT
></A
>.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>lm interval = 60</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>lm interval = 120</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="LOADPRINTERS"
></A
>load printers (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>A boolean variable that controls whether all 
		printers in the printcap will be loaded for browsing by default. 
		See the <A
HREF="#AEN79"
>printers</A
> section for 
		more details.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>load printers = yes</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="LOCALMASTER"
></A
>local master (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This option allows <A
HREF="nmbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>		nmbd(8)</B
></A
> to try and become a local master browser 
		on a subnet. If set to <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>no</TT
> then <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>		nmbd</B
> will not attempt to become a local master browser 
		on a subnet and will also lose in all browsing elections. By
		default this value is set to <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>yes</TT
>. Setting this value to <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>yes</TT
> doesn't
		mean that Samba will <EM
>become</EM
> the local master 
		browser on a subnet, just that <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>nmbd</B
> will <EM
>		participate</EM
> in elections for local master browser.</P
><P
>Setting this value to <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>no</TT
> will cause <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>nmbd</B
>
		<EM
>never</EM
> to become a local master browser.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>local master = yes</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="LOCKDIR"
></A
>lock dir (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>Synonym for <A
HREF="#LOCKDIRECTORY"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		lock directory</I
></TT
></A
>.</P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="LOCKDIRECTORY"
></A
>lock directory (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This option specifies the directory where lock 
		files will be placed.  The lock files are used to implement the 
		<A
HREF="#MAXCONNECTIONS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>max connections</I
></TT
>
		</A
> option.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>lock directory = ${prefix}/var/locks</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>lock directory = /var/run/samba/locks</B
>
		</P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="LOCKSPINCOUNT"
></A
>lock spin count (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter controls the number of times
		that smbd should attempt to gain a byte range lock on the 
		behalf of a client request.  Experiments have shown that
		Windows 2k servers do not reply with a failure if the lock
		could not be immediately granted, but try a few more times
		in case the lock could later be aquired.  This behavior
		is used to support PC database formats such as MS Access
		and FoxPro.
		</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>lock spin count = 2</B
>
		</P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="LOCKSPINTIME"
></A
>lock spin time (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>The time in microseconds that smbd should 
		pause before attempting to gain a failed lock.  See
		<A
HREF="#LOCKSPINCOUNT"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>lock spin 
		count</I
></TT
></A
> for more details.
		</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>lock spin time = 10</B
>
		</P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="LOCKING"
></A
>locking (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This controls whether or not locking will be 
		performed by the server in response to lock requests from the 
		client.</P
><P
>If <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>locking = no</B
>, all lock and unlock 
		requests will appear to succeed and all lock queries will report 
		that the file in question is available for locking.</P
><P
>If <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>locking = yes</B
>, real locking will be performed 
		by the server.</P
><P
>This option <EM
>may</EM
> be useful for read-only 
		filesystems which <EM
>may</EM
> not need locking (such as 
		CDROM drives), although setting this parameter of <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>no</TT
> 
		is not really recommended even in this case.</P
><P
>Be careful about disabling locking either globally or in a 
		specific service, as lack of locking may result in data corruption. 
		You should never need to set this parameter.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>locking = yes</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="LOGFILE"
></A
>log file (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This option allows you to override the name 
		of the Samba log file (also known as the debug file).</P
><P
>This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing 
		you to have separate log files for each user or machine.</P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>log file = /usr/local/samba/var/log.%m
		</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="LOGLEVEL"
></A
>log level (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>The value of the parameter (an integer) allows 
		the debug level (logging level) to be specified in the 
		<TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>smb.conf</TT
> file. This is to give greater 
		flexibility in the configuration of the system.</P
><P
>The default will be the log level specified on 
		the command line or level zero if none was specified.</P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>log level = 3</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="LOGONDRIVE"
></A
>logon drive (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter specifies the local path to 
		which the home directory will be connected (see <A
HREF="#LOGONHOME"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>logon home</I
></TT
></A
>) 
		and is only used by NT Workstations. </P
><P
>Note that this option is only useful if Samba is set up as a
		logon server.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>logon drive = z:</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>logon drive = h:</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="LOGONHOME"
></A
>logon home (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter specifies the home directory 
		location when a Win95/98 or NT Workstation logs into a Samba PDC.  
		It allows you to do </P
><P
><TT
CLASS="PROMPT"
>C:\&#62; </TT
><TT
CLASS="USERINPUT"
><B
>NET USE H: /HOME</B
></TT
>
		</P
><P
>from a command prompt, for example.</P
><P
>This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing 
		you to have separate logon scripts for each user or machine.</P
><P
>This parameter can be used with Win9X workstations to ensure 
		that roaming profiles are stored in a subdirectory of the user's 
		home directory.  This is done in the following way:</P
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>logon home = \\%N\%U\profile</B
></P
><P
>This tells Samba to return the above string, with 
		substitutions made when a client requests the info, generally 
		in a NetUserGetInfo request.  Win9X clients truncate the info to
		\\server\share when a user does <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>net use /home</B
>
		but use the whole string when dealing with profiles.</P
><P
>Note that in prior versions of Samba, the <A
HREF="#LOGONPATH"
>		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>logon path</I
></TT
></A
> was returned rather than 
		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>logon home</I
></TT
>.  This broke <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>net use 
		/home</B
> but allowed profiles outside the home directory.  
		The current implementation is correct, and can be used for 
		profiles if you use the above trick.</P
><P
>This option is only useful if Samba is set up as a logon 
		server.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>logon home = "\\%N\%U"</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>logon home = "\\remote_smb_server\%U"</B
>
		</P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="LOGONPATH"
></A
>logon path (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter specifies the home directory 
		where roaming profiles (NTuser.dat etc files for Windows NT) are 
		stored.  Contrary to previous versions of these manual pages, it has 
		nothing to do with Win 9X roaming profiles.  To find out how to 
		handle roaming profiles for Win 9X system, see the <A
HREF="#LOGONHOME"
>		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>logon home</I
></TT
></A
> parameter.</P
><P
>This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing you 
		to have separate logon scripts for each user or machine.  It also 
		specifies the directory from which the "Application Data", 
		(<TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>desktop</TT
>, <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>start menu</TT
>,
		<TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>network neighborhood</TT
>, <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>programs</TT
> 
		and other folders, and their contents, are loaded and displayed on 
		your Windows NT client.</P
><P
>The share and the path must be readable by the user for 
		the preferences and directories to be loaded onto the Windows NT
		client.  The share must be writeable when the user logs in for the first
		time, in order that the Windows NT client can create the NTuser.dat
		and other directories.</P
><P
>Thereafter, the directories and any of the contents can, 
		if required, be made read-only.  It is not advisable that the 
		NTuser.dat file be made read-only - rename it to NTuser.man to 
		achieve the desired effect (a <EM
>MAN</EM
>datory 
		profile). </P
><P
>Windows clients can sometimes maintain a connection to 
		the [homes] share, even though there is no user logged in.  
		Therefore, it is vital that the logon path does not include a 
		reference to the homes share (i.e. setting this parameter to
		\%N\%U\profile_path will cause problems).</P
><P
>This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing 
		you to have separate logon scripts for each user or machine.</P
><P
>Note that this option is only useful if Samba is set up 
		as a logon server.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>logon path = \\%N\%U\profile</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>logon path = \\PROFILESERVER\PROFILE\%U</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="LOGONSCRIPT"
></A
>logon script (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter specifies the batch file (.bat) or 
		NT command file (.cmd) to be downloaded and run on a machine when 
		a user successfully logs in.  The file must contain the DOS 
		style CR/LF line endings. Using a DOS-style editor to create the 
		file is recommended.</P
><P
>The script must be a relative path to the [netlogon] 
		service.  If the [netlogon] service specifies a <A
HREF="#PATH"
>		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>path</I
></TT
></A
> of <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>/usr/local/samba/netlogon
		</TT
>, and <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>logon script = STARTUP.BAT</B
>, then 
		the file that will be downloaded is:</P
><P
><TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>/usr/local/samba/netlogon/STARTUP.BAT</TT
></P
><P
>The contents of the batch file are entirely your choice.  A 
		suggested command would be to add <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>NET TIME \\SERVER /SET 
		/YES</B
>, to force every machine to synchronize clocks with 
		the same time server.  Another use would be to add <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>NET USE 
		U: \\SERVER\UTILS</B
> for commonly used utilities, or <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>		NET USE Q: \\SERVER\ISO9001_QA</B
> for example.</P
><P
>Note that it is particularly important not to allow write 
		access to the [netlogon] share, or to grant users write permission 
		on the batch files in a secure environment, as this would allow 
		the batch files to be arbitrarily modified and security to be 
		breached.</P
><P
>This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing you 
		to have separate logon scripts for each user or machine.</P
><P
>This option is only useful if Samba is set up as a logon 
		server.</P
><P
>Default: <EM
>no logon script defined</EM
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>logon script = scripts\%U.bat</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="LPPAUSECOMMAND"
></A
>lppause command (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter specifies the command to be 
		executed on the server host in order to stop printing or spooling 
		a specific print job.</P
><P
>This command should be a program or script which takes 
		a printer name and job number to pause the print job. One way 
		of implementing this is by using job priorities, where jobs 
		having a too low priority won't be sent to the printer.</P
><P
>If a <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>%p</I
></TT
> is given then the printer name 
		is put in its place. A <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>%j</I
></TT
> is replaced with 
		the job number (an integer).  On HPUX (see <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>printing=hpux
		</I
></TT
>), if the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>-p%p</I
></TT
> option is added 
		to the lpq command, the job will show up with the correct status, i.e. 
		if the job priority is lower than the set fence priority it will 
		have the PAUSED status, whereas if  the priority is equal or higher it 
		will have the SPOOLED or PRINTING status.</P
><P
>Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path 
		in the lppause command as the PATH may not be available to the server.</P
><P
>See also the <A
HREF="#PRINTING"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>printing
		</I
></TT
></A
> parameter.</P
><P
>Default: Currently no default value is given to 
		this string, unless the value of the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>printing</I
></TT
> 
		parameter is <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>SYSV</TT
>, in which case the default is :</P
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>lp -i %p-%j -H hold</B
></P
><P
>or if the value of the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>printing</I
></TT
> parameter 
		is <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>SOFTQ</TT
>, then the default is:</P
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>qstat -s -j%j -h</B
></P
><P
>Example for HPUX: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>lppause command = /usr/bin/lpalt 	
		%p-%j -p0</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="LPQCACHETIME"
></A
>lpq cache time (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This controls how long lpq info will be cached 
		for to prevent the <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>lpq</B
> command being called too 
		often. A separate cache is kept for each variation of the <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>		lpq</B
> command used by the system, so if you use different 
		<B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>lpq</B
> commands for different users then they won't
		share cache information.</P
><P
>The cache files are stored in <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>/tmp/lpq.xxxx</TT
> 
		where xxxx is a hash of the <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>lpq</B
> command in use.</P
><P
>The default is 10 seconds, meaning that the cached results 
		of a previous identical <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>lpq</B
> command will be used 
		if the cached data is less than 10 seconds old. A large value may 
		be advisable if your <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>lpq</B
> command is very slow.</P
><P
>A value of 0 will disable caching completely.</P
><P
>See also the <A
HREF="#PRINTING"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>printing
		</I
></TT
></A
> parameter.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>lpq cache time = 10</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>lpq cache time = 30</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="LPQCOMMAND"
></A
>lpq command (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter specifies the command to be 
		executed on the server host in order to obtain <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>lpq
		</B
>-style printer status information.</P
><P
>This command should be a program or script which 
		takes a printer name as its only parameter and outputs printer 
		status information.</P
><P
>Currently nine styles of printer status information 
		are supported; BSD, AIX, LPRNG, PLP, SYSV, HPUX, QNX, CUPS, and SOFTQ. 
		This covers most UNIX systems. You control which type is expected 
		using the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>printing =</I
></TT
> option.</P
><P
>Some clients (notably Windows for Workgroups) may not 
		correctly send the connection number for the printer they are 
		requesting status information about. To get around this, the 
		server reports on the first printer service connected to by the 
		client. This only happens if the connection number sent is invalid.</P
><P
>If a <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>%p</I
></TT
> is given then the printer name 
		is put in its place. Otherwise it is placed at the end of the 
		command.</P
><P
>Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path 
		in the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>lpq command</I
></TT
> as the <TT
CLASS="ENVAR"
>$PATH
		</TT
> may not be available to the server.  When compiled with
		the CUPS libraries, no <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>lpq command</I
></TT
> is
		needed because smbd will make a library call to obtain the 
		print queue listing.</P
><P
>See also the <A
HREF="#PRINTING"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>printing
		</I
></TT
></A
> parameter.</P
><P
>Default: <EM
>depends on the setting of <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		printing</I
></TT
></EM
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>lpq command = /usr/bin/lpq -P%p</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="LPRESUMECOMMAND"
></A
>lpresume command (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter specifies the command to be 
		executed on the server host in order to restart or continue 
		printing or spooling a specific print job.</P
><P
>This command should be a program or script which takes 
		a printer name and job number to resume the print job. See 
		also the <A
HREF="#LPPAUSECOMMAND"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>lppause command
		</I
></TT
></A
> parameter.</P
><P
>If a <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>%p</I
></TT
> is given then the printer name 
		is put in its place. A <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>%j</I
></TT
> is replaced with 
		the job number (an integer).</P
><P
>Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path 
		in the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>lpresume command</I
></TT
> as the PATH may not 
		be available to the server.</P
><P
>See also the <A
HREF="#PRINTING"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>printing
		</I
></TT
></A
> parameter.</P
><P
>Default: Currently no default value is given 
		to this string, unless the value of the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>printing</I
></TT
> 
		parameter is <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>SYSV</TT
>, in which case the default is :</P
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>lp -i %p-%j -H resume</B
></P
><P
>or if the value of the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>printing</I
></TT
> parameter 
		is <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>SOFTQ</TT
>, then the default is:</P
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>qstat -s -j%j -r</B
></P
><P
>Example for HPUX: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>lpresume command = /usr/bin/lpalt 
		%p-%j -p2</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="LPRMCOMMAND"
></A
>lprm command (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter specifies the command to be 
		executed on the server host in order to delete a print job.</P
><P
>This command should be a program or script which takes 
		a printer name and job number, and deletes the print job.</P
><P
>If a <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>%p</I
></TT
> is given then the printer name 
		is put in its place. A <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>%j</I
></TT
> is replaced with 
		the job number (an integer).</P
><P
>Note that it is good practice to include the absolute 
		path in the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>lprm command</I
></TT
> as the PATH may not be 
		available to the server.</P
><P
>See also the <A
HREF="#PRINTING"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>printing
		</I
></TT
></A
> parameter.</P
><P
>Default: <EM
>depends on the setting of <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>printing
		</I
></TT
></EM
></P
><P
>Example 1: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>lprm command = /usr/bin/lprm -P%p %j
		</B
></P
><P
>Example 2: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>lprm command = /usr/bin/cancel %p-%j
		</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="MACHINEPASSWORDTIMEOUT"
></A
>machine password timeout (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>If a Samba server is a member of a Windows 
		NT Domain (see the <A
HREF="#SECURITYEQUALSDOMAIN"
>security = domain</A
>) 
		parameter) then periodically a running <A
HREF="smbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>		smbd(8)</A
> process will try and change the MACHINE ACCOUNT 
		PASSWORD stored in the TDB called <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>private/secrets.tdb
		</TT
>.  This parameter specifies how often this password 
		will be changed, in seconds. The default is one week (expressed in 
		seconds), the same as a Windows NT Domain member server.</P
><P
>See also <A
HREF="smbpasswd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbpasswd(8)
		</B
></A
>, and the <A
HREF="#SECURITYEQUALSDOMAIN"
>		security = domain</A
>) parameter.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>machine password timeout = 604800</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="MAGICOUTPUT"
></A
>magic output (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter specifies the name of a file 
		which will contain output created by a magic script (see the 
		<A
HREF="#MAGICSCRIPT"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>magic script</I
></TT
></A
>
		parameter below).</P
><P
>Warning: If two clients use the same <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>magic script
		</I
></TT
> in the same directory the output file content
		is undefined.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>magic output = &#60;magic script name&#62;.out
		</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>magic output = myfile.txt</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="MAGICSCRIPT"
></A
>magic script (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter specifies the name of a file which, 
		if opened, will be executed by the server when the file is closed. 
		This allows a UNIX script to be sent to the Samba host and 
		executed on behalf of the connected user.</P
><P
>Scripts executed in this way will be deleted upon 
		completion assuming that the user has the appropriate level 
		of privilege and the file permissions allow the deletion.</P
><P
>If the script generates output, output will be sent to 
		the file specified by the <A
HREF="#MAGICOUTPUT"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		magic output</I
></TT
></A
> parameter (see above).</P
><P
>Note that some shells are unable to interpret scripts 
		containing CR/LF instead of CR as 
		the end-of-line marker. Magic scripts must be executable 
		<EM
>as is</EM
> on the host, which for some hosts and 
		some shells will require filtering at the DOS end.</P
><P
>Magic scripts are <EM
>EXPERIMENTAL</EM
> and 
		should <EM
>NOT</EM
> be relied upon.</P
><P
>Default: <EM
>None. Magic scripts disabled.</EM
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>magic script = user.csh</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="MANGLECASE"
></A
>mangle case (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>See the section on <A
HREF="#AEN203"
>		NAME MANGLING</A
></P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>mangle case = no</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="MANGLEDMAP"
></A
>mangled map (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This is for those who want to directly map UNIX 
		file names which cannot be represented on Windows/DOS.  The mangling 
		of names is not always what is needed.  In particular you may have 
		documents with file extensions that differ between DOS and UNIX. 
		For example, under UNIX it is common to use <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>.html</TT
> 
		for HTML files, whereas under Windows/DOS <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>.htm</TT
> 
		is more commonly used.</P
><P
>So to map <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>html</TT
> to <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>htm</TT
> 
		you would use:</P
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>mangled map = (*.html *.htm)</B
></P
><P
>One very useful case is to remove the annoying <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>;1
		</TT
> off the ends of filenames on some CDROMs (only visible 
		under some UNIXes). To do this use a map of (*;1 *;).</P
><P
>Default: <EM
>no mangled map</EM
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>mangled map = (*;1 *;)</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="MANGLEDNAMES"
></A
>mangled names (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This controls whether non-DOS names under UNIX 
		should be mapped to DOS-compatible names ("mangled") and made visible, 
		or whether non-DOS names should simply be ignored.</P
><P
>See the section on <A
HREF="#AEN203"
>		NAME MANGLING</A
> for details on how to control the mangling process.</P
><P
>If mangling algorithm "hash" is used then the mangling algorithm is as follows:</P
><P
></P
><UL
><LI
><P
>The first (up to) five alphanumeric characters 
			before the rightmost dot of the filename are preserved, forced 
			to upper case, and appear as the first (up to) five characters 
			of the mangled name.</P
></LI
><LI
><P
>A tilde "~" is appended to the first part of the mangled
			name, followed by a two-character unique sequence, based on the
			original root name (i.e., the original filename minus its final
			extension). The final extension is included in the hash calculation
			only if it contains any upper case characters or is longer than three
			characters.</P
><P
>Note that the character to use may be specified using 
			the <A
HREF="#MANGLINGCHAR"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>mangling char</I
></TT
>
			</A
> option, if you don't like '~'.</P
></LI
><LI
><P
>The first three alphanumeric characters of the final 
			extension are preserved, forced to upper case and appear as the 
			extension of the mangled name. The final extension is defined as that 
			part of the original filename after the rightmost dot. If there are no 
			dots in the filename, the mangled name will have no extension (except 
			in the case of "hidden files" - see below).</P
></LI
><LI
><P
>Files whose UNIX name begins with a dot will be 
			presented as DOS hidden files. The mangled name will be created as 
			for other filenames, but with the leading dot removed and "___" as 
			its extension regardless of actual original extension (that's three 
			underscores).</P
></LI
></UL
><P
>The two-digit hash value consists of upper case 
		alphanumeric characters.</P
><P
>This algorithm can cause name collisions only if files 
		in a directory share the same first five alphanumeric characters. 
		The probability of such a clash is 1/1300.</P
><P
>If mangling algorithm "hash2" is used then the mangling algorithm is as follows:</P
><P
></P
><UL
><LI
><P
>The first alphanumeric character 
			before the rightmost dot of the filename is preserved, forced 
			to upper case, and appears as the first character of the mangled name.
			</P
></LI
><LI
><P
>A base63 hash of 5 characters is generated and the
			first 4 characters of that hash are appended to the first character.
			</P
></LI
><LI
><P
>A tilde "~" is appended to the first part of the mangled
			name, followed by the final character of the base36 hash of the name.
			</P
><P
>Note that the character to use may be specified using 
			the <A
HREF="#MANGLINGCHAR"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>mangling char</I
></TT
>
			</A
> option, if you don't like '~'.</P
></LI
><LI
><P
>The first three alphanumeric characters of the final 
			extension are preserved, forced to upper case and appear as the 
			extension of the mangled name. The final extension is defined as that 
			part of the original filename after the rightmost dot. If there are no 
			dots in the filename, the mangled name will have no extension (except 
			in the case of "hidden files" - see below).</P
></LI
><LI
><P
>Files whose UNIX name begins with a dot will be 
			presented as DOS hidden files. The mangled name will be created as 
			for other filenames, but with the leading dot removed and "___" as 
			its extension regardless of actual original extension (that's three 
			underscores).</P
></LI
></UL
><P
>The name mangling (if enabled) allows a file to be 
		copied between UNIX directories from Windows/DOS while retaining 
		the long UNIX filename. UNIX files can be renamed to a new extension 
		from Windows/DOS and will retain the same basename. Mangled names 
		do not change between sessions.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>mangled names = yes</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="MANGLEDSTACK"
></A
>mangled stack (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter controls the number of mangled names 
		that should be cached in the Samba server <A
HREF="smbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>		smbd(8)</A
>.</P
><P
>This stack is a list of recently mangled base names 
		(extensions are only maintained if they are longer than 3 characters 
		or contains upper case characters).</P
><P
>The larger this value, the more likely it is that mangled 
		names can be successfully converted to correct long UNIX names. 
		However, large stack sizes will slow most directory accesses. Smaller 
		stacks save memory in the server (each stack element costs 256 bytes).
		</P
><P
>It is not possible to absolutely guarantee correct long 
		filenames, so be prepared for some surprises!</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>mangled stack = 50</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>mangled stack = 100</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="MANGLINGCHAR"
></A
>mangling char (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This controls what character is used as 
		the <EM
>magic</EM
> character in <A
HREF="#AEN203"
>name mangling</A
>. The default is a '~'
		but this may interfere with some software. Use this option to set 
		it to whatever you prefer.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>mangling char = ~</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>mangling char = ^</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="MANGLINGMETHOD"
></A
>mangling mathod(G)</DT
><DD
><P
> controls the algorithm used for the generating
                the mangled names. Can take two different values, "hash" and
                "hash2". "hash" is  the default and is the algorithm that has been
                used in Samba for many years. "hash2" is a newer and considered
                a better algorithm (generates less collisions) in the names.
                However, many Win32 applications store the mangled names and so
		changing to the new algorithm must not be done
                lightly as these applications may break unless reinstalled.
                New installations of Samba may set the default to hash2.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>mangling method = hash</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>mangling method = hash2</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="MAPARCHIVE"
></A
>map archive (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This controls whether the DOS archive attribute 
		should be mapped to the UNIX owner execute bit.  The DOS archive bit 
		is set when a file has been modified since its last backup.  One 
		motivation for this option it to keep Samba/your PC from making 
		any file it touches from becoming executable under UNIX.  This can 
		be quite annoying for shared source code, documents, etc...</P
><P
>Note that this requires the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>create mask</I
></TT
>
		parameter to be set such that owner execute bit is not masked out 
		(i.e. it must include 100). See the parameter <A
HREF="#CREATEMASK"
>		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>create mask</I
></TT
></A
> for details.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>map archive = yes</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="MAPHIDDEN"
></A
>map hidden (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This controls whether DOS style hidden files 
		should be mapped to the UNIX world execute bit.</P
><P
>Note that this requires the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>create mask</I
></TT
> 
		to be set such that the world execute bit is not masked out (i.e. 
		it must include 001). See the parameter <A
HREF="#CREATEMASK"
>		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>create mask</I
></TT
></A
> for details.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>map hidden = no</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="MAPSYSTEM"
></A
>map system (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This controls whether DOS style system files 
		should be mapped to the UNIX group execute bit.</P
><P
>Note that this requires the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>create mask</I
></TT
> 
		to be set such that the group execute bit is not masked out (i.e. 
		it must include 010). See the parameter <A
HREF="#CREATEMASK"
>		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>create mask</I
></TT
></A
> for details.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>map system = no</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="MAPTOGUEST"
></A
>map to guest (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter is only useful in <A
HREF="#SECURITY"
>		security</A
> modes other than <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>security = share</I
></TT
> 
		- i.e. <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>user</TT
>, <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>server</TT
>, 
		and <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>domain</TT
>.</P
><P
>This parameter can take three different values, which tell
		<A
HREF="smbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>smbd(8)</A
> what to do with user 
		login requests that don't match a valid UNIX user in some way.</P
><P
>The three settings are :</P
><P
></P
><UL
><LI
><P
><TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>Never</TT
> - Means user login 
			requests with an invalid password are rejected. This is the 
			default.</P
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>Bad User</TT
> - Means user
			logins with an invalid password are rejected, unless the username 
			does not exist, in which case it is treated as a guest login and 
			mapped into the <A
HREF="#GUESTACCOUNT"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>			guest account</I
></TT
></A
>.</P
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>Bad Password</TT
> - Means user logins 
			with an invalid password are treated as a guest login and mapped 
			into the <A
HREF="#GUESTACCOUNT"
>guest account</A
>. Note that 
			this can cause problems as it means that any user incorrectly typing 
			their password will be silently logged on as "guest" - and 
			will not know the reason they cannot access files they think
			they should - there will have been no message given to them
			that they got their password wrong. Helpdesk services will
			<EM
>hate</EM
> you if you set the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>map to 
			guest</I
></TT
> parameter this way :-).</P
></LI
></UL
><P
>Note that this parameter is needed to set up "Guest" 
		share services when using <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>security</I
></TT
> modes other than 
		share. This is because in these modes the name of the resource being
		requested is <EM
>not</EM
> sent to the server until after 
		the server has successfully authenticated the client so the server 
		cannot make authentication decisions at the correct time (connection 
		to the share) for "Guest" shares.</P
><P
>For people familiar with the older Samba releases, this 
		parameter maps to the old compile-time setting of the <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>		GUEST_SESSSETUP</TT
> value in local.h.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>map to guest = Never</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>map to guest = Bad User</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="MAXCONNECTIONS"
></A
>max connections (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This option allows the number of simultaneous 
		connections to a service to be limited. If <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>max connections
		</I
></TT
> is greater than 0 then connections will be refused if 
		this number of connections to the service are already open. A value 
		of zero mean an unlimited number of connections may be made.</P
><P
>Record lock files are used to implement this feature. The 
		lock files will be stored in the directory specified by the <A
HREF="#LOCKDIRECTORY"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>lock directory</I
></TT
></A
> 
		option.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>max connections = 0</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>max connections = 10</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="MAXDISKSIZE"
></A
>max disk size (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This option allows you to put an upper limit 
		on the apparent size of disks. If you set this option to 100 
		then all shares will appear to be not larger than 100 MB in 
		size.</P
><P
>Note that this option does not limit the amount of 
		data you can put on the disk. In the above case you could still 
		store much more than 100 MB on the disk, but if a client ever asks 
		for the amount of free disk space or the total disk size then the 
		result will be bounded by the amount specified in <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>max 
		disk size</I
></TT
>.</P
><P
>This option is primarily useful to work around bugs 
		in some pieces of software that can't handle very large disks, 
		particularly disks over 1GB in size.</P
><P
>A <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>max disk size</I
></TT
> of 0 means no limit.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>max disk size = 0</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>max disk size = 1000</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="MAXLOGSIZE"
></A
>max log size (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This option (an integer in kilobytes) specifies 
		the max size the log file should grow to. Samba periodically checks 
		the size and if it is exceeded it will rename the file, adding 
		a <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>.old</TT
> extension.</P
><P
>A size of 0 means no limit.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>max log size = 5000</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>max log size = 1000</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="MAXMUX"
></A
>max mux (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This option controls the maximum number of 
		outstanding simultaneous SMB operations that Samba tells the client 
		it will allow. You should never need to set this parameter.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>max mux = 50</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="MAXOPENFILES"
></A
>max open files (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter limits the maximum number of 
		open files that one <A
HREF="smbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>smbd(8)</A
> file 
		serving process may have open for a client at any one time. The 
		default for this parameter is set very high (10,000) as Samba uses 
		only one bit per unopened file.</P
><P
>The limit of the number of open files is usually set 
		by the UNIX per-process file descriptor limit rather than 
		this parameter so you should never need to touch this parameter.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>max open files = 10000</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="MAXPRINTJOBS"
></A
>max print jobs (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter limits the maximum number of 
		jobs allowable in a Samba printer queue at any given moment.
		If this number is exceeded, <A
HREF="smbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>		smbd(8)</B
></A
> will remote "Out of Space" to the client.
		See all <A
HREF="#TOTALPRINTJOBS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>total
		print jobs</I
></TT
></A
>.
		</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>max print jobs = 1000</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>max print jobs = 5000</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="MAXPROTOCOL"
></A
>max protocol (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>The value of the parameter (a string) is the highest 
		protocol level that will be supported by the server.</P
><P
>Possible values are :</P
><P
></P
><UL
><LI
><P
><TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>CORE</TT
>: Earliest version. No 
			concept of user names.</P
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>COREPLUS</TT
>: Slight improvements on 
			CORE for efficiency.</P
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>LANMAN1</TT
>: First <EM
>			modern</EM
> version of the protocol. Long filename
			support.</P
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>LANMAN2</TT
>: Updates to Lanman1 protocol.
			</P
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>NT1</TT
>: Current up to date version of 
			the protocol. Used by Windows NT. Known as CIFS.</P
></LI
></UL
><P
>Normally this option should not be set as the automatic 
		negotiation phase in the SMB protocol takes care of choosing 
		the appropriate protocol.</P
><P
>See also <A
HREF="#MINPROTOCOL"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>min
		protocol</I
></TT
></A
></P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>max protocol = NT1</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>max protocol = LANMAN1</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="MAXSMBDPROCESSES"
></A
>max smbd processes (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter limits the maximum number of 
		<A
HREF="smbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbd(8)</B
></A
>
		processes concurrently running on a system and is intended
		as a stopgap to prevent degrading service to clients in the event
		that the server has insufficient resources to handle more than this
		number of connections.  Remember that under normal operating
		conditions, each user will have an <A
HREF="smbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>smbd</A
> associated with him or her
		to handle connections to all shares from a given host.
		</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>max smbd processes = 0</B
>   ## no limit</P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>max smbd processes = 1000</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="MAXTTL"
></A
>max ttl (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This option tells <A
HREF="nmbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>nmbd(8)</A
>
		what the default 'time to live' of NetBIOS names should be (in seconds) 
		when <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>nmbd</B
> is requesting a name using either a
		broadcast packet or from a WINS server. You should never need to
		change this parameter. The default is 3 days.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>max ttl = 259200</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="MAXWINSTTL"
></A
>max wins ttl (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This option tells <A
HREF="nmbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>nmbd(8)
		</A
> when acting as a WINS server (<A
HREF="#WINSSUPPORT"
>		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>wins support = yes</I
></TT
></A
>) what the maximum
		'time to live' of NetBIOS names that <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>nmbd</B
> 
		will grant will be (in seconds). You should never need to change this
		parameter.  The default is 6 days (518400 seconds).</P
><P
>See also the <A
HREF="#MINWINSTTL"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>min 
		wins ttl</I
></TT
></A
> parameter.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>max wins ttl = 518400</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="MAXXMIT"
></A
>max xmit (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This option controls the maximum packet size 
		that will be negotiated by Samba. The default in Samba 2.2.6 is
		now 16644 (changed from 65535 in earlier releases) which matches
		Windows 2000. This allows better performance with Windows NT clients.
		The maximum is 65535. In some cases you may find you get better performance 
		with a smaller value. A value below 2048 is likely to cause problems.
		</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>max xmit = 16644</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>max xmit = 8192</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="MESSAGECOMMAND"
></A
>message command (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This specifies what command to run when the 
		server receives a WinPopup style message.</P
><P
>This would normally be a command that would 
		deliver the message somehow. How this is to be done is 
		up to your imagination.</P
><P
>An example is:</P
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>message command = csh -c 'xedit %s;rm %s' &#38;</B
>
		</P
><P
>This delivers the message using <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>xedit</B
>, then 
		removes it afterwards. <EM
>NOTE THAT IT IS VERY IMPORTANT 
		THAT THIS COMMAND RETURN IMMEDIATELY</EM
>. That's why I 
		have the '&#38;' on the end. If it doesn't return immediately then 
		your PCs may freeze when sending messages (they should recover 
		after 30 seconds, hopefully).</P
><P
>All messages are delivered as the global guest user. 
		The command takes the standard substitutions, although <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		%u</I
></TT
> won't work (<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>%U</I
></TT
> may be better 
		in this case).</P
><P
>Apart from the standard substitutions, some additional 
		ones apply. In particular:</P
><P
></P
><UL
><LI
><P
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>%s</I
></TT
> = the filename containing 
			the message.</P
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>%t</I
></TT
> = the destination that 
			the message was sent to (probably the server name).</P
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>%f</I
></TT
> = who the message 
			is from.</P
></LI
></UL
><P
>You could make this command send mail, or whatever else 
		takes your fancy. Please let us know of any really interesting 
		ideas you have.</P
><P
>Here's a way of sending the messages as mail to root:</P
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>message command = /bin/mail -s 'message from %f on 
		%m' root &#60; %s; rm %s</B
></P
><P
>If you don't have a message command then the message 
		won't be delivered and Samba will tell the sender there was 
		an error. Unfortunately WfWg totally ignores the error code 
		and carries on regardless, saying that the message was delivered.
		</P
><P
>If you want to silently delete it then try:</P
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>message command = rm %s</B
></P
><P
>Default: <EM
>no message command</EM
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>message command = csh -c 'xedit %s;
		rm %s' &#38;</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="MINPASSWDLENGTH"
></A
>min passwd length (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>Synonym for <A
HREF="#MINPASSWORDLENGTH"
>		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>min password length</I
></TT
></A
>.</P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="MINPASSWORDLENGTH"
></A
>min password length (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This option sets the minimum length in characters 
		of a plaintext password that <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbd</B
> will accept when performing 
		UNIX password changing.</P
><P
>See also <A
HREF="#UNIXPASSWORDSYNC"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>unix 
		password sync</I
></TT
></A
>, <A
HREF="#PASSWDPROGRAM"
>		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>passwd program</I
></TT
></A
> and <A
HREF="#PASSWDCHATDEBUG"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>passwd chat debug</I
></TT
>
		</A
>.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>min password length = 5</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="MINPRINTSPACE"
></A
>min print space (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This sets the minimum amount of free disk 
		space that must be available before a user will be able to spool 
		a print job. It is specified in kilobytes. The default is 0, which 
		means a user can always spool a print job.</P
><P
>See also the <A
HREF="#PRINTING"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>printing
		</I
></TT
></A
> parameter.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>min print space = 0</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>min print space = 2000</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="MINPROTOCOL"
></A
>min protocol (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>The value of the parameter (a string) is the 
		lowest SMB protocol dialect than Samba will support.  Please refer
		to the <A
HREF="#MAXPROTOCOL"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>max protocol</I
></TT
></A
>
		parameter for a list of valid protocol names and a brief description
		of each.  You may also wish to refer to the C source code in
		<TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>source/smbd/negprot.c</TT
> for a listing of known protocol
		dialects supported by clients.</P
><P
>If you are viewing this parameter as a security measure, you should
		also refer to the <A
HREF="#LANMANAUTH"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>lanman 
		auth</I
></TT
></A
> parameter.  Otherwise, you should never need 
		to change this parameter.</P
><P
>Default : <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>min protocol = CORE</B
></P
><P
>Example : <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>min protocol = NT1</B
>  # disable DOS 
		clients</P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="MINWINSTTL"
></A
>min wins ttl (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This option tells <A
HREF="nmbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>nmbd(8)</A
>
		when acting as a WINS server (<A
HREF="#WINSSUPPORT"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		wins support = yes</I
></TT
></A
>) what the minimum 'time to live' 
		of NetBIOS names that <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>nmbd</B
> will grant will be (in 
		seconds). You should never need to change this parameter.  The default 
		is 6 hours (21600 seconds).</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>min wins ttl = 21600</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="MSDFSROOT"
></A
>msdfs root (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This boolean parameter is only available if 
		Samba is configured  and  compiled with the <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>		--with-msdfs</B
> option.  If set to <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>yes</TT
>, 
		Samba treats the share as a Dfs root and  allows clients to browse 
		the distributed file system tree rooted at the share directory. 
		Dfs links are specified  in  the share directory by symbolic 
		links of the form <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>msdfs:serverA\shareA,serverB\shareB
		</TT
> and so on.  For more information on setting up a Dfs tree 
		on Samba,  refer to <A
HREF="msdfs_setup.html"
TARGET="_top"
>msdfs_setup.html
		</A
>.</P
><P
>See also <A
HREF="#HOSTMSDFS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>host msdfs
		</I
></TT
></A
></P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>msdfs root = no</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="NAMERESOLVEORDER"
></A
>name resolve order (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This option is used by the programs in the Samba 
		suite to determine what naming services to use and in what order 
		to resolve host names to IP addresses. The option takes a space 
		separated string of name resolution options.</P
><P
>The options are :"lmhosts", "host", "wins" and "bcast". They 
		cause names to be resolved as follows :</P
><P
></P
><UL
><LI
><P
><TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>lmhosts</TT
> : Lookup an IP 
			address in the Samba lmhosts file. If the line in lmhosts has 
			no name type attached to the NetBIOS name (see the <A
HREF="lmhosts.5.html"
TARGET="_top"
>lmhosts(5)</A
> for details) then
			any name type matches for lookup.</P
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>host</TT
> : Do a standard host 
			name to IP address resolution, using the system <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>/etc/hosts
			</TT
>, NIS, or DNS lookups. This method of name resolution 
			is operating system depended for instance on IRIX or Solaris this 
			may be controlled by the <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>/etc/nsswitch.conf</TT
> 
			file.  Note that this method is only used if the NetBIOS name 
			type being queried is the 0x20 (server) name type, otherwise 
			it is ignored.</P
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>wins</TT
> : Query a name with 
			the IP address listed in the <A
HREF="#WINSSERVER"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>			wins server</I
></TT
></A
> parameter.  If no WINS server has
			been specified this method will be ignored.</P
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>bcast</TT
> : Do a broadcast on 
			each of the known local interfaces listed in the <A
HREF="#INTERFACES"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>interfaces</I
></TT
></A
> 
			parameter. This is the least reliable of the name resolution 
			methods as it depends on the target host being on a locally 
			connected subnet.</P
></LI
></UL
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>name resolve order = lmhosts host wins bcast
		</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>name resolve order = lmhosts bcast host
		</B
></P
><P
>This will cause the local lmhosts file to be examined 
		first, followed by a broadcast attempt, followed by a normal 
		system hostname lookup.</P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="NETBIOSALIASES"
></A
>netbios aliases (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This is a list of NetBIOS names that <A
HREF="nmbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>nmbd(8)</A
> will advertise as additional 
		names by which the Samba server is known. This allows one machine 
		to appear in browse lists under multiple names. If a machine is 
		acting as a browse server or logon server none 
		of these names will be advertised as either browse server or logon 
		servers, only the primary name of the machine will be advertised 
		with these capabilities.</P
><P
>See also <A
HREF="#NETBIOSNAME"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>netbios 
		name</I
></TT
></A
>.</P
><P
>Default: <EM
>empty string (no additional names)</EM
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>netbios aliases = TEST TEST1 TEST2</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="NETBIOSNAME"
></A
>netbios name (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This sets the NetBIOS name by which a Samba 
		server is known. By default it is the same as the first component 
		of the host's DNS name. If a machine is a browse server or
		logon server this name (or the first component
		of the hosts DNS name) will be the name that these services are
		advertised under.</P
><P
>See also <A
HREF="#NETBIOSALIASES"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>netbios 
		aliases</I
></TT
></A
>.</P
><P
>Default: <EM
>machine DNS name</EM
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>netbios name = MYNAME</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="NETBIOSSCOPE"
></A
>netbios scope (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This sets the NetBIOS scope that Samba will 
		operate under. This should not be set unless every machine 
		on your LAN also sets this value.</P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="NISHOMEDIR"
></A
>nis homedir (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>Get the home share server from a NIS map. For 
		UNIX systems that use an automounter, the user's home directory 
		will often be mounted on a workstation on demand from a remote 
		server. </P
><P
>When the Samba logon server is not the actual home directory 
		server, but is mounting the home directories via NFS then two 
		network hops would be required to access the users home directory 
		if the logon server told the client to use itself as the SMB server 
	 	for home directories (one over SMB and one over NFS). This can 
		be very slow.</P
><P
>This option allows Samba to return the home share as 
		being on a different server to the logon server and as 
		long as a Samba daemon is running on the home directory server, 
		it will be mounted on the Samba client directly from the directory 
		server. When Samba is returning the home share to the client, it 
		will consult the NIS map specified in <A
HREF="#HOMEDIRMAP"
>		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>homedir map</I
></TT
></A
> and return the server 
		listed there.</P
><P
>Note that for this option to work there must be a working 
		NIS system and the Samba server with this option must also 
		be a logon server.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>nis homedir = no</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="NTACLSUPPORT"
></A
>nt acl support (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This boolean parameter controls whether 
		<A
HREF="smbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>smbd(8)</A
> will attempt to map 
		UNIX permissions into Windows NT access control lists.
		This parameter was formally a global parameter in releases
		prior to 2.2.2.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>nt acl support = yes</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="NTPIPESUPPORT"
></A
>nt pipe support (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This boolean parameter controls whether 
		<A
HREF="smbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>smbd(8)</A
> will allow Windows NT 
		clients to connect to the NT SMB specific <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>IPC$</TT
> 
		pipes. This is a developer debugging option and can be left
		alone.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>nt pipe support = yes</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="NTSMBSUPPORT"
></A
>nt smb support (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This boolean parameter controls whether <A
HREF="smbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>smbd(8)</A
> will negotiate NT specific SMB
		support with Windows NT/2k/XP clients. Although this is a developer
		debugging option and should be left alone, benchmarking has discovered
		that Windows NT clients give faster performance with this option
		set to <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>no</TT
>. This is still being investigated.
	 	If this option is set to <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>no</TT
> then Samba offers
		exactly the same SMB calls that versions prior to Samba 2.0 offered.
		This information may be of use if any users are having problems
		with NT SMB support.</P
><P
>You should not need to ever disable this parameter.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>nt smb support = yes</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="NTSTATUSSUPPORT"
></A
>nt status support (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This boolean parameter controls whether <A
HREF="smbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>smbd(8)</A
> will negotiate NT specific status
		support with Windows NT/2k/XP clients. This is a developer
		debugging option and should be left alone.
	 	If this option is set to <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>no</TT
> then Samba offers
		exactly the same DOS error codes that versions prior to Samba 2.2.3
		reported.</P
><P
>You should not need to ever disable this parameter.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>nt status support = yes</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="NULLPASSWORDS"
></A
>null passwords (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>Allow or disallow client access to accounts 
		that have null passwords. </P
><P
>See also <A
HREF="smbpasswd.5.html"
TARGET="_top"
>smbpasswd (5)</A
>.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>null passwords = no</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="OBEYPAMRESTRICTIONS"
></A
>obey pam restrictions (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>When Samba 2.2 is configured to enable PAM support
		(i.e. --with-pam), this parameter will control whether or not Samba
		should obey PAM's account and session management directives.  The 
		default behavior is to use PAM for clear text authentication only
		and to ignore any account or session management.  Note that Samba
		always ignores PAM for authentication in the case of <A
HREF="#ENCRYPTPASSWORDS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>encrypt passwords = yes</I
></TT
>
		</A
>.  The reason is that PAM modules cannot support the challenge/response
		authentication mechanism needed in the presence of SMB password encryption.
		</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>obey pam restrictions = no</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="ONLYUSER"
></A
>only user (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This is a boolean option that controls whether 
		connections with usernames not in the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>user</I
></TT
> 
		list will be allowed. By default this option is disabled so that a 
		client can supply a username to be used by the server.  Enabling
		this parameter will force the server to only use the login 
		names from the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>user</I
></TT
> list and is only really
		useful in <A
HREF="#SECURITYEQUALSSHARE"
>share level</A
>
		security.</P
><P
>Note that this also means Samba won't try to deduce 
		usernames from the service name. This can be annoying for 
		the [homes] section. To get around this you could use <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>user =
		%S</B
> which means your <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>user</I
></TT
> list
		will be just the service name, which for home directories is the 
		name of the user.</P
><P
>See also the <A
HREF="#USER"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>user</I
></TT
>
		</A
> parameter.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>only user = no</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="ONLYGUEST"
></A
>only guest (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>A synonym for <A
HREF="#GUESTONLY"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		guest only</I
></TT
></A
>.</P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="OPLOCKBREAKWAITTIME"
></A
>oplock break wait time (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This is a tuning parameter added due to bugs in 
		both Windows 9x and WinNT. If Samba responds to a client too 
		quickly when that client issues an SMB that can cause an oplock 
		break request, then the network client can fail and not respond 
		to the break request. This tuning parameter (which is set in milliseconds) 
		is the amount of time Samba will wait before sending an oplock break 
		request to such (broken) clients.</P
><P
><EM
>DO NOT CHANGE THIS PARAMETER UNLESS YOU HAVE READ 
		AND UNDERSTOOD THE SAMBA OPLOCK CODE</EM
>.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>oplock break wait time = 0</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="OPLOCKCONTENTIONLIMIT"
></A
>oplock contention limit (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This is a <EM
>very</EM
> advanced 
		<A
HREF="smbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>smbd(8)</A
> tuning option to 
		improve the efficiency of the granting of oplocks under multiple 
		client contention for the same file.</P
><P
>In brief it specifies a number, which causes <A
HREF="smbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>smbd</A
> not to 
		grant an oplock even when requested if the approximate number of 
		clients contending for an oplock on the same file goes over this 
		limit. This causes <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbd</B
> to behave in a similar 
		way to Windows NT.</P
><P
><EM
>DO NOT CHANGE THIS PARAMETER UNLESS YOU HAVE READ 
		AND UNDERSTOOD THE SAMBA OPLOCK CODE</EM
>.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>oplock contention limit = 2</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="OPLOCKS"
></A
>oplocks (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This boolean option tells <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbd</B
> whether to 
		issue oplocks (opportunistic locks) to file open requests on this 
		share. The oplock code can dramatically (approx. 30% or more) improve 
	 	the speed of access to files on Samba servers. It allows the clients 
		to aggressively cache files locally and you may want to disable this 
		option for unreliable network environments (it is turned on by 
		default in Windows NT Servers).  For more information see the file 
		<TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>Speed.txt</TT
> in the Samba <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>docs/</TT
> 
		directory.</P
><P
>Oplocks may be selectively turned off on certain files with a 
		share. See the <A
HREF="#VETOOPLOCKFILES"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		veto oplock files</I
></TT
></A
> parameter. On some systems 
		oplocks are recognized by the underlying operating system. This 
		allows data synchronization between all access to oplocked files, 
		whether it be via Samba or NFS or a local UNIX process. See the 
		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>kernel oplocks</I
></TT
> parameter for details.</P
><P
>See also the <A
HREF="#KERNELOPLOCKS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>kernel 
		oplocks</I
></TT
></A
> and <A
HREF="#LEVEL2OPLOCKS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		level2 oplocks</I
></TT
></A
> parameters.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>oplocks = yes</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="OSLEVEL"
></A
>os level (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This integer value controls what level Samba 
		advertises itself as for browse elections. The value of this 
		parameter determines whether <A
HREF="nmbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>nmbd(8)</A
> 
		has a chance of becoming a local master browser for the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		WORKGROUP</I
></TT
> in the local broadcast area.</P
><P
><EM
>Note :</EM
>By default, Samba will win 
		a local master browsing election over all Microsoft operating 
		systems except a Windows NT 4.0/2000 Domain Controller.  This 
		means that a misconfigured Samba host can effectively isolate 
		a subnet for browsing purposes.  See <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>BROWSING.txt
		</TT
> in the Samba <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>docs/</TT
> directory 
		for details.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>os level = 20</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>os level = 65 </B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="OS2DRIVERMAP"
></A
>os2 driver map (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>The parameter is used to define the absolute
		path to a file containing a mapping of Windows NT printer driver
		names to OS/2 printer driver names.  The format is:</P
><P
>&#60;nt driver name&#62; = &#60;os2 driver 
		name&#62;.&#60;device name&#62;</P
><P
>For example, a valid entry using the HP LaserJet 5
		printer driver would appear as <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>HP LaserJet 5L = LASERJET.HP 
		LaserJet 5L</B
>.</P
><P
>The need for the file is due to the printer driver namespace 
		problem described in the <A
HREF="printer_driver2.html"
TARGET="_top"
>Samba 
		Printing HOWTO</A
>.  For more details on OS/2 clients, please 
		refer to the <A
HREF="OS2-Client-HOWTO.html"
TARGET="_top"
>OS2-Client-HOWTO
		</A
> containing in the Samba documentation.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>os2 driver map = &#60;empty string&#62;
		</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="PAMPASSWORDCHANGE"
></A
>pam password change (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>With the addition of better PAM support in Samba 2.2, 
  		this parameter, it is possible to use PAM's password change control 
  		flag for Samba.  If enabled, then PAM will be used for password
 		changes when requested by an SMB client instead of the program listed in 
                <A
HREF="#PASSWDPROGRAM"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>passwd program</I
></TT
></A
>. 
                It should be possible to enable this without changing your 
                <A
HREF="#PASSWDCHAT"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>passwd chat</I
></TT
></A
>
                parameter for most setups.
  		</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>pam password change = no</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="PANICACTION"
></A
>panic action (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This is a Samba developer option that allows a 
		system command to be called when either <A
HREF="smbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>		smbd(8)</A
> or <A
HREF="nmbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>nmbd(8)</A
> 
		crashes. This is usually used to draw attention to the fact that 
		a problem occurred.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>panic action = &#60;empty string&#62;</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>panic action = "/bin/sleep 90000"</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="PASSWDCHAT"
></A
>passwd chat (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This string controls the <EM
>"chat"</EM
> 
		conversation that takes places between <A
HREF="smbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>smbd</A
> and the local password changing
		program to change the user's password. The string describes a 
		sequence of response-receive pairs that <A
HREF="smbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>		smbd(8)</A
> uses to determine what to send to the 
		<A
HREF="#PASSWDPROGRAM"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>passwd program</I
></TT
>
		</A
> and what to expect back. If the expected output is not 
		received then the password is not changed.</P
><P
>This chat sequence is often quite site specific, depending 
		on what local methods are used for password control (such as NIS 
		etc).</P
><P
>Note that this parameter only is only used if the <A
HREF="#UNIXPASSWORDSYNC"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>unix 
		password sync</I
></TT
></A
> parameter is set to <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>yes</TT
>. This 
		sequence is then called <EM
>AS ROOT</EM
> when the SMB password 
		in the smbpasswd file is being changed, without access to the old 
		password cleartext. This means that root must be able to reset the user's password
 		without knowing the text of the previous password. In the presence of NIS/YP, 
		this means that the <A
HREF="#PASSWDPROGRAM"
>passwd program</A
> must be 
		executed on the NIS master.
		</P
><P
>The string can contain the macro <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>%n</I
></TT
> which is substituted 
		for the new password.  The chat sequence can also contain the standard 
		macros <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>\n</TT
>, <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>\r</TT
>, <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>		\t</TT
> and <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>\s</TT
> to give line-feed, 
		carriage-return, tab and space.  The chat sequence string can also contain 
		a '*' which matches any sequence of characters.
		Double quotes can be used to collect strings with spaces 
		in them into a single string.</P
><P
>If the send string in any part of the chat sequence 
		is a full stop ".",  then no string is sent. Similarly, 
		if the expect string is a full stop then no string is expected.</P
><P
>If the <A
HREF="#PAMPASSWORDCHANGE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>pam
 		password change</I
></TT
></A
> parameter is set to <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>yes</TT
>, the chat pairs
                may be matched in any order, and success is determined by the PAM result, 
                not any particular output. The \n macro is ignored for PAM conversions.
  		</P
><P
>See also <A
HREF="#UNIXPASSWORDSYNC"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>unix password 
		sync</I
></TT
></A
>, <A
HREF="#PASSWDPROGRAM"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		passwd program</I
></TT
></A
> ,<A
HREF="#PASSWDCHATDEBUG"
>		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>passwd chat debug</I
></TT
></A
> and <A
HREF="#PAMPASSWORDCHANGE"
>		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>pam password change</I
></TT
></A
>.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>passwd chat = *new*password* %n\n 
		*new*password* %n\n *changed*</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>passwd chat = "*Enter OLD password*" %o\n 
		"*Enter NEW password*" %n\n "*Reenter NEW password*" %n\n "*Password 
		changed*"</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="PASSWDCHATDEBUG"
></A
>passwd chat debug (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This boolean specifies if the passwd chat script 
		parameter is run in <EM
>debug</EM
> mode. In this mode the 
		strings passed to and received from the passwd chat are printed 
		in the <A
HREF="smbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>smbd(8)</A
> log with a 
		<A
HREF="#DEBUGLEVEL"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>debug level</I
></TT
></A
> 
		of 100. This is a dangerous option as it will allow plaintext passwords 
		to be seen in the <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbd</B
> log. It is available to help 
		Samba admins debug their <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>passwd chat</I
></TT
> scripts 
		when calling the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>passwd program</I
></TT
> and should 
 		be turned off after this has been done. This option has no effect if the 
                <A
HREF="#PAMPASSWORDCHANGE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>pam password change</I
></TT
></A
>
                paramter is set. This parameter is off by default.</P
><P
>See also <A
HREF="#PASSWDCHAT"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>passwd chat</I
></TT
>
 		</A
>, <A
HREF="#PAMPASSWORDCHANGE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>pam password change</I
></TT
>
                </A
>, <A
HREF="#PASSWDPROGRAM"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>passwd program</I
></TT
>
  		</A
>.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>passwd chat debug = no</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="PASSWDPROGRAM"
></A
>passwd program (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>The name of a program that can be used to set 
		UNIX user passwords.  Any occurrences of <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>%u</I
></TT
> 
		will be replaced with the user name. The user name is checked for 
		existence before calling the password changing program.</P
><P
>Also note that many passwd programs insist in <EM
>reasonable
		</EM
> passwords, such as a minimum length, or the inclusion 
		of mixed case chars and digits. This can pose a problem as some clients 
		(such as Windows for Workgroups) uppercase the password before sending 
		it.</P
><P
><EM
>Note</EM
> that if the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>unix 
		password sync</I
></TT
> parameter is set to <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>yes
		</TT
> then this program is called <EM
>AS ROOT</EM
> 
		before the SMB password in the <A
HREF="smbpasswd.5.html"
TARGET="_top"
>smbpasswd(5)
		</A
> file is changed. If this UNIX password change fails, then 
		<B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbd</B
> will fail to change the SMB password also 
		(this is by design).</P
><P
>If the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>unix password sync</I
></TT
> parameter 
		is set this parameter <EM
>MUST USE ABSOLUTE PATHS</EM
> 
		for <EM
>ALL</EM
> programs called, and must be examined 
		for security implications. Note that by default <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>unix 
		password sync</I
></TT
> is set to <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>no</TT
>.</P
><P
>See also <A
HREF="#UNIXPASSWORDSYNC"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>unix 
		password sync</I
></TT
></A
>.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>passwd program = /bin/passwd</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>passwd program = /sbin/npasswd %u</B
>
		</P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="PASSWORDLEVEL"
></A
>password level (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>Some client/server combinations have difficulty 
		with mixed-case passwords.  One offending client is Windows for 
		Workgroups, which for some reason forces passwords to upper 
		case when using the LANMAN1 protocol, but leaves them alone when 
		using COREPLUS!  Another problem child is the Windows 95/98
		family of operating systems.  These clients upper case clear
		text passwords even when NT LM 0.12 selected by the protocol
		negotiation request/response.</P
><P
>This parameter defines the maximum number of characters 
		that may be upper case in passwords.</P
><P
>For example, say the password given was "FRED". If <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		password level</I
></TT
> is set to 1, the following combinations 
		would be tried if "FRED" failed:</P
><P
>"Fred", "fred", "fRed", "frEd","freD"</P
><P
>If <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>password level</I
></TT
> was set to 2, 
		the following combinations would also be tried: </P
><P
>"FRed", "FrEd", "FreD", "fREd", "fReD", "frED", ..</P
><P
>And so on.</P
><P
>The higher value this parameter is set to the more likely 
		it is that a mixed case password will be matched against a single 
		case password. However, you should be aware that use of this 
		parameter reduces security and increases the time taken to 
 		process a new connection.</P
><P
>A value of zero will cause only two attempts to be 
		made - the password as is and the password in all-lower case.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>password level = 0</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>password level = 4</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="PASSWORDSERVER"
></A
>password server (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>By specifying the name of another SMB server (such 
		as a WinNT box) with this option, and using <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>security = domain
		</B
> or <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>security = server</B
> you can get Samba 
		to do all its username/password validation via a remote server.</P
><P
>This option sets the name of the password server to use. 
		It must be a NetBIOS name, so if the machine's NetBIOS name is 
		different from its Internet name then you may have to add its NetBIOS 
		name to the lmhosts  file which is stored in the same directory 
		as the <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>smb.conf</TT
> file.</P
><P
>The name of the password server is looked up using the 
		parameter <A
HREF="#NAMERESOLVEORDER"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>name 
		resolve order</I
></TT
></A
> and so may resolved
		by any method and order described in that parameter.</P
><P
>The password server much be a machine capable of using 
		the "LM1.2X002" or the "NT LM 0.12" protocol, and it must be in 
		user level security mode.</P
><P
><EM
>NOTE:</EM
> Using a password server 
		means your UNIX box (running Samba) is only as secure as your 
		password server. <EM
>DO NOT CHOOSE A PASSWORD SERVER THAT 
		YOU DON'T COMPLETELY TRUST</EM
>.</P
><P
>Never point a Samba server at itself for password 
		serving. This will cause a loop and could lock up your Samba 
		server!</P
><P
>The name of the password server takes the standard 
		substitutions, but probably the only useful one is <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>%m
		</I
></TT
>, which means the Samba server will use the incoming 
	 	client as the password server. If you use this then you better 
		trust your clients, and you had better restrict them with hosts allow!</P
><P
>If the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>security</I
></TT
> parameter is set to
		<TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>domain</TT
>, then the list of machines in this 
		option must be a list of Primary or Backup Domain controllers for the
		Domain or the character '*', as the Samba server is effectively
		in that domain, and will use cryptographically authenticated RPC calls
		to authenticate the user logging on. The advantage of using <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>		security = domain</B
> is that if you list several hosts in the 
		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>password server</I
></TT
> option then <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbd
		</B
> will try each in turn till it finds one that responds. This 
		is useful in case your primary server goes down.</P
><P
>If the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>password server</I
></TT
> option is set 
		to the character '*', then Samba will attempt to auto-locate the 
		Primary or Backup Domain controllers to authenticate against by 
		doing a query for the name <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>WORKGROUP&#60;1C&#62;</TT
> 
		and then contacting each server returned in the list of IP 
		addresses from the name resolution source. </P
><P
>If the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>security</I
></TT
> parameter is 
		set to <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>server</TT
>, then there are different
		restrictions that <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>security = domain</B
> doesn't 
		suffer from:</P
><P
></P
><UL
><LI
><P
>You may list several password servers in 
			the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>password server</I
></TT
> parameter, however if an 
			<B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbd</B
> makes a connection to a password server, 
			and then the password server fails, no more users will be able 
			to be authenticated from this <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbd</B
>.  This is a 
			restriction of the SMB/CIFS protocol when in <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>security = server
			</B
> mode and cannot be fixed in Samba.</P
></LI
><LI
><P
>If you are using a Windows NT server as your 
			password server then you will have to ensure that your users 
			are able to login from the Samba server, as when in <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>			security = server</B
>  mode the network logon will appear to 
			come from there rather than from the users workstation.</P
></LI
></UL
><P
>See also the <A
HREF="#SECURITY"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>security
		</I
></TT
></A
> parameter.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>password server = &#60;empty string&#62;</B
>
		</P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>password server = NT-PDC, NT-BDC1, NT-BDC2
		</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>password server = *</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="PATH"
></A
>path (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter specifies a directory to which 
		the user of the service is to be given access. In the case of 
		printable services, this is where print data will spool prior to 
		being submitted to the host for printing.</P
><P
>For a printable service offering guest access, the service 
		should be readonly and the path should be world-writeable and 
		have the sticky bit set. This is not mandatory of course, but 
		you probably won't get the results you expect if you do 
		otherwise.</P
><P
>Any occurrences of <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>%u</I
></TT
> in the path 
		will be replaced with the UNIX username that the client is using 
		on this connection. Any occurrences of <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>%m</I
></TT
> 
		will be replaced by the NetBIOS name of the machine they are 
		connecting from. These replacements are very useful for setting 
		up pseudo home directories for users.</P
><P
>Note that this path will be based on <A
HREF="#ROOTDIR"
>		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>root dir</I
></TT
></A
> if one was specified.</P
><P
>Default: <EM
>none</EM
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>path = /home/fred</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="PIDDIRECTORY"
></A
>pid directory (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This option specifies the directory where pid 
		files will be placed.  </P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>pid directory = ${prefix}/var/locks</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>pid directory = /var/run/</B
>
		</P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="POSIXLOCKING"
></A
>posix locking (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>The <A
HREF="smbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbd(8)</B
></A
>
		daemon maintains an database of file locks obtained by SMB clients.
		The default behavior is to map this internal database to POSIX
		locks.  This means that file locks obtained by SMB clients are 
		consistent with those seen by POSIX compliant applications accessing 
		the files via a non-SMB method (e.g. NFS or local file access).  
		You should never need to disable this parameter.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>posix locking = yes</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="POSTEXEC"
></A
>postexec (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This option specifies a command to be run 
		whenever the service is disconnected. It takes the usual 
		substitutions. The command may be run as the root on some 
		systems.</P
><P
>An interesting example may be to unmount server 
		resources:</P
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>postexec = /etc/umount /cdrom</B
></P
><P
>See also <A
HREF="#PREEXEC"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>preexec</I
></TT
>
		</A
>.</P
><P
>Default: <EM
>none (no command executed)</EM
>
		</P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>postexec = echo \"%u disconnected from %S 
		from %m (%I)\" &#62;&#62; /tmp/log</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="POSTSCRIPT"
></A
>postscript (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter forces a printer to interpret 
		the print files as PostScript. This is done by adding a <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>%!
		</TT
> to the start of print output.</P
><P
>This is most useful when you have lots of PCs that persist 
		in putting a control-D at the start of print jobs, which then 
		confuses your printer.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>postscript = no</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="PREEXEC"
></A
>preexec (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This option specifies a command to be run whenever 
		the service is connected to. It takes the usual substitutions.</P
><P
>An interesting example is to send the users a welcome 
		message every time they log in. Maybe a message of the day? Here 
		is an example:</P
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>preexec = csh -c 'echo \"Welcome to %S!\" |
		 /usr/local/samba/bin/smbclient -M %m -I %I' &#38; </B
></P
><P
>Of course, this could get annoying after a while :-)</P
><P
>See also <A
HREF="#PREEXECCLOSE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>preexec close
		</I
></TT
></A
> and <A
HREF="#POSTEXEC"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>postexec
		</I
></TT
></A
>.</P
><P
>Default: <EM
>none (no command executed)</EM
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>preexec = echo \"%u connected to %S from %m
		(%I)\" &#62;&#62; /tmp/log</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="PREEXECCLOSE"
></A
>preexec close (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This boolean option controls whether a non-zero 
		return code from <A
HREF="#PREEXEC"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>preexec
		</I
></TT
></A
> should close the service being connected to.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>preexec close = no</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="PREFERREDMASTER"
></A
>preferred master (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This boolean parameter controls if <A
HREF="nmbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>nmbd(8)</A
> is a preferred master browser 
		for its workgroup.</P
><P
>If this is set to <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>yes</TT
>, on startup, <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>nmbd</B
> 
		will force an election, and it will have a slight advantage in 
		winning the election.  It is recommended that this parameter is 
		used in conjunction with <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
><A
HREF="#DOMAINMASTER"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		domain master</I
></TT
></A
> = yes</B
>, so that <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>		nmbd</B
> can guarantee becoming a domain master.</P
><P
>Use this option with caution, because if there are several 
		hosts (whether Samba servers, Windows 95 or NT) that are preferred 
		master browsers on the same subnet, they will each periodically 
		and continuously attempt to become the local master browser.  
		This will result in unnecessary broadcast traffic and reduced browsing
		capabilities.</P
><P
>See also <A
HREF="#OSLEVEL"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>os level</I
></TT
>
		</A
>.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>preferred master = auto</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="PREFEREDMASTER"
></A
>prefered master (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>Synonym for <A
HREF="#PREFERREDMASTER"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		preferred master</I
></TT
></A
> for people who cannot spell :-).</P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="PRELOAD"
></A
>preload</DT
><DD
><P
>This is a list of services that you want to be 
		automatically added to the browse lists. This is most useful 
		for homes and printers services that would otherwise not be 
		visible.</P
><P
>Note that if you just want all printers in your 
		printcap file loaded then the <A
HREF="#LOADPRINTERS"
>		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>load printers</I
></TT
></A
> option is easier.</P
><P
>Default: <EM
>no preloaded services</EM
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>preload = fred lp colorlp</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="PRESERVECASE"
></A
>preserve case (S)</DT
><DD
><P
> This controls if new filenames are created
		with the case that the client passes, or if they are forced to 
		be the <A
HREF="#DEFAULTCASE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>default case
		</I
></TT
></A
>.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>preserve case = yes</B
></P
><P
>See the section on <A
HREF="#AEN203"
>NAME 
		MANGLING</A
> for a fuller discussion.</P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="PRINTCOMMAND"
></A
>print command (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>After a print job has finished spooling to 
		a service, this command will be used via a <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>system()</B
> 
		call to process the spool file. Typically the command specified will 
		submit the spool file to the host's printing subsystem, but there 
 		is no requirement that this be the case. The server will not remove 
		the spool file, so whatever command you specify should remove the 
		spool file when it has been processed, otherwise you will need to 
		manually remove old spool files.</P
><P
>The print command is simply a text string. It will be used 
		verbatim after macro substitutions have been made:</P
><P
>s, %p - the path to the spool
		file name</P
><P
>%p - the appropriate printer 
		name</P
><P
>%J - the job 
		name as transmitted by the client.</P
><P
>%c - The number of printed pages
		of the spooled job (if known).</P
><P
>%z - the size of the spooled
		print job (in bytes)</P
><P
>The print command <EM
>MUST</EM
> contain at least 
		one occurrence of <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>%s</I
></TT
> or <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>%f
		</I
></TT
> - the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>%p</I
></TT
> is optional. At the time 
		a job is submitted, if no printer name is supplied the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>%p
		</I
></TT
> will be silently removed from the printer command.</P
><P
>If specified in the [global] section, the print command given 
		will be used for any printable service that does not have its own 
		print command specified.</P
><P
>If there is neither a specified print command for a 
		printable service nor a global print command, spool files will 
		be created but not processed and (most importantly) not removed.</P
><P
>Note that printing may fail on some UNIXes from the 
		<TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>nobody</TT
> account. If this happens then create 
		an alternative guest account that can print and set the <A
HREF="#GUESTACCOUNT"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>guest account</I
></TT
></A
> 
		in the [global] section.</P
><P
>You can form quite complex print commands by realizing 
		that they are just passed to a shell. For example the following 
		will log a print job, print the file, then remove it. Note that 
		';' is the usual separator for command in shell scripts.</P
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>print command = echo Printing %s &#62;&#62; 
		/tmp/print.log; lpr -P %p %s; rm %s</B
></P
><P
>You may have to vary this command considerably depending 
		on how you normally print files on your system. The default for 
		the parameter varies depending on the setting of the <A
HREF="#PRINTING"
>		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>printing</I
></TT
></A
> parameter.</P
><P
>Default: For <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>printing = BSD, AIX, QNX, LPRNG 
		or PLP :</B
></P
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>print command = lpr -r -P%p %s</B
></P
><P
>For <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>printing = SYSV or HPUX :</B
></P
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>print command = lp -c -d%p %s; rm %s</B
></P
><P
>For <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>printing = SOFTQ :</B
></P
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>print command = lp -d%p -s %s; rm %s</B
></P
><P
>For printing = CUPS :   If SAMBA is compiled against
		libcups, then <A
HREF="#PRINTING"
>printcap = cups</A
> 
		uses the CUPS API to
		submit jobs, etc.  Otherwise it maps to the System V
		commands with the -oraw option for printing, i.e. it
		uses <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>lp -c -d%p -oraw; rm %s</B
>.   
		With <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>printing = cups</B
>,
		and if SAMBA is compiled against libcups, any manually 
		set print command will be ignored.</P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>print command = /usr/local/samba/bin/myprintscript
		%p %s</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="PRINTOK"
></A
>print ok (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>Synonym for <A
HREF="#PRINTABLE"
>		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>printable</I
></TT
></A
>.</P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="PRINTABLE"
></A
>printable (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>If this parameter is <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>yes</TT
>, then 
		clients may open, write to and submit spool files on the directory 
		specified for the service. </P
><P
>Note that a printable service will ALWAYS allow writing 
		to the service path (user privileges permitting) via the spooling 
		of print data. The <A
HREF="#READONLY"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>read only
		</I
></TT
></A
> parameter controls only non-printing access to 
		the resource.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>printable = no</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="PRINTCAP"
></A
>printcap (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>Synonym for 	<A
HREF="#PRINTCAPNAME"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		printcap name</I
></TT
></A
>.</P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="PRINTCAPNAME"
></A
>printcap name (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter may be used to override the 
		compiled-in default printcap name used by the server (usually <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>		/etc/printcap</TT
>). See the discussion of the <A
HREF="#AEN79"
>[printers]</A
> section above for reasons 
		why you might want to do this.</P
><P
>To use the CUPS printing interface set <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>printcap name = cups
		</B
>. This should be supplemented by an addtional setting 
		<A
HREF="#PRINTING"
>printing = cups</A
> in the [global] 
		section.  <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>printcap name = cups</B
> will use the  
		"dummy" printcap created by CUPS, as specified in your CUPS
		configuration file.
		</P
><P
>On System V systems that use <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>lpstat</B
> to 
		list available printers you can use <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>printcap name = lpstat
		</B
> to automatically obtain lists of available printers. This 
		is the default for systems that define SYSV at configure time in 
		Samba (this includes most System V based systems). If <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		printcap name</I
></TT
> is set to <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>lpstat</B
> on 
		these systems then Samba will launch <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>lpstat -v</B
> and 
		attempt to parse the output to obtain a printer list.</P
><P
>A minimal printcap file would look something like this:</P
><P
><TABLE
BORDER="0"
BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
WIDTH="90%"
><TR
><TD
><PRE
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
>		print1|My Printer 1
		print2|My Printer 2
		print3|My Printer 3
		print4|My Printer 4
		print5|My Printer 5
		</PRE
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
></P
><P
>where the '|' separates aliases of a printer. The fact 
		that the second alias has a space in it gives a hint to Samba 
		that it's a comment.</P
><P
><EM
>NOTE</EM
>: Under AIX the default printcap 
		name is <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>/etc/qconfig</TT
>. Samba will assume the 
		file is in AIX <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>qconfig</TT
> format if the string
		<TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>qconfig</TT
> appears in the printcap filename.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>printcap name = /etc/printcap</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>printcap name = /etc/myprintcap</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="PRINTERADMIN"
></A
>printer admin (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This is a list of users that can do anything to 
		printers via the remote administration interfaces offered by MS-RPC 
		(usually using a NT workstation). Note that the root user always 
		has admin rights.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>printer admin = &#60;empty string&#62;</B
>
		</P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>printer admin = admin, @staff</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="PRINTERDRIVER"
></A
>printer driver (S)</DT
><DD
><P
><EM
>Note :</EM
>This is a deprecated 
		parameter and will be removed in the next major release
		following version 2.2.  Please see the instructions in
		the <A
HREF="printer_driver2.html"
TARGET="_top"
>Samba 2.2. Printing
		HOWTO</A
> for more information
		on the new method of loading printer drivers onto a Samba server.
		</P
><P
>This option allows you to control the string 
		that clients receive when they ask the server for the printer driver 
		associated with a printer. If you are using Windows95 or Windows NT 
		then you can use this to automate the setup of printers on your 
		system.</P
><P
>You need to set this parameter to the exact string (case 
		sensitive) that describes the appropriate printer driver for your 
		system. If you don't know the exact string to use then you should 
		first try with no <A
HREF="#PRINTERDRIVER"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		printer driver</I
></TT
></A
> option set and the client will 
		give you a list of printer drivers. The appropriate strings are 
		shown in a scroll box after you have chosen the printer manufacturer.</P
><P
>See also <A
HREF="#PRINTERDRIVERFILE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>printer
		driver file</I
></TT
></A
>.</P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>printer driver = HP LaserJet 4L</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="PRINTERDRIVERFILE"
></A
>printer driver file (G)</DT
><DD
><P
><EM
>Note :</EM
>This is a deprecated 
		parameter and will be removed in the next major release
		following version 2.2.  Please see the instructions in
		the <A
HREF="printer_driver2.html"
TARGET="_top"
>Samba 2.2. Printing
		HOWTO</A
> for more information
		on the new method of loading printer drivers onto a Samba server.
		</P
><P
>This parameter tells Samba where the printer driver 
		definition file, used when serving drivers to Windows 95 clients, is 
		to be found. If this is not set, the default is :</P
><P
><TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
><TT
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>SAMBA_INSTALL_DIRECTORY</I
></TT
>
		/lib/printers.def</TT
></P
><P
>This file is created from Windows 95 <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>msprint.inf
		</TT
> files found on the Windows 95 client system. For more 
		details on setting up serving of printer drivers to Windows 95 
		clients, see the outdated documentation file in the <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>docs/</TT
> 
		directory, <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>PRINTER_DRIVER.txt</TT
>.</P
><P
>See also <A
HREF="#PRINTERDRIVERLOCATION"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		printer driver location</I
></TT
></A
>.</P
><P
>Default: <EM
>None (set in compile).</EM
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>printer driver file = 
		/usr/local/samba/printers/drivers.def</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="PRINTERDRIVERLOCATION"
></A
>printer driver location (S)</DT
><DD
><P
><EM
>Note :</EM
>This is a deprecated 
		parameter and will be removed in the next major release
		following version 2.2.  Please see the instructions in
		the <A
HREF="printer_driver2.html"
TARGET="_top"
>Samba 2.2. Printing
		HOWTO</A
> for more information
		on the new method of loading printer drivers onto a Samba server.
		</P
><P
>This parameter tells clients of a particular printer 
		share where to find the printer driver files for the automatic 
		installation of drivers for Windows 95 machines. If Samba is set up 
		to serve printer drivers to Windows 95 machines, this should be set to</P
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>\\MACHINE\PRINTER$</B
></P
><P
>Where MACHINE is the NetBIOS name of your Samba server, 
		and PRINTER$ is a share you set up for serving printer driver 
		files. For more details on setting this up see the outdated documentation 
		file in the <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>docs/</TT
> directory, <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>		PRINTER_DRIVER.txt</TT
>.</P
><P
>See also <A
HREF="#PRINTERDRIVERFILE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		printer driver file</I
></TT
></A
>.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>none</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>printer driver location = \\MACHINE\PRINTER$
		</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="PRINTERNAME"
></A
>printer name (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter specifies the name of the printer 
		to which print jobs spooled through a printable service will be sent.</P
><P
>If specified in the [global] section, the printer
		name given will be used for any printable service that does 
		not have its own printer name specified.</P
><P
>Default: <EM
>none (but may be <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>lp</TT
> 
		on many systems)</EM
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>printer name = laserwriter</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="PRINTER"
></A
>printer (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>Synonym for <A
HREF="#PRINTERNAME"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		printer name</I
></TT
></A
>.</P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="PRINTING"
></A
>printing (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameters controls how printer status 
		information is interpreted on your system. It also affects the 
		default values for the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>print command</I
></TT
>, 
		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>lpq command</I
></TT
>, <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>lppause command
		</I
></TT
>, <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>lpresume command</I
></TT
>, and 
		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>lprm command</I
></TT
> if specified in the 
		[global] section.</P
><P
>Currently nine printing styles are supported. They are
		<TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>BSD</TT
>, <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>AIX</TT
>, 
		<TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>LPRNG</TT
>, <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>PLP</TT
>,
		<TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>SYSV</TT
>, <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>HPUX</TT
>,
		<TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>QNX</TT
>, <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>SOFTQ</TT
>,
		and <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>CUPS</TT
>.</P
><P
>To see what the defaults are for the other print 
		commands when using the various options use the <A
HREF="testparm.1.html"
TARGET="_top"
>testparm(1)</A
> program.</P
><P
>This option can be set on a per printer basis</P
><P
>See also the discussion in the <A
HREF="#AEN79"
>		[printers]</A
> section.</P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="PROFILEACLS"
></A
>profile acls (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>		This boolean parameter was added to fix the problems that people have been
		having with storing user profiles on Samba shares from Windows 2000 or
		Windows XP clients. New versions of Windows 2000 or Windows XP service
		packs do security ACL checking on the owner and ability to write of the
		profile directory stored on a local workstation when copied from a Samba
		share. When not in domain mode with winbindd then the security info copied
		onto the local workstation has no meaning to the logged in user (SID) on
		that workstation so the profile storing fails. Adding this parameter
		onto a share used for profile storage changes two things about the
		returned Windows ACL. Firstly it changes the owner and group owner
		of all reported files and directories to be BUILTIN\Administrators,
		BUILTIN\Users respectively (SIDs S-1-5-32-544, S-1-5-32-545). Secondly
		it adds an ACE entry of "Full Control" to the SID BUILTIN\Users to
		every returned ACL. This will allow any Windows 2000 or XP workstation
		user to access the profile. Note that if you have multiple users logging
		on to a workstation then in order to prevent them from being able to access
		each others profiles you must remove the "Bypass traverse checking" advanced
		user right. This will prevent access to other users profile directories as
		the top level profile directory (named after the user) is created by the
		workstation profile code and has an ACL restricting entry to the directory
		tree to the owning user.</P
><P
>If you didn't understand the above text, you probably should not set
		this parameter :-).</P
><P
>Default <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>profile acls = no</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="PROTOCOL"
></A
>protocol (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>Synonym for <A
HREF="#MAXPROTOCOL"
>		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>max protocol</I
></TT
></A
>.</P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="PUBLIC"
></A
>public (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>Synonym for <A
HREF="#GUESTOK"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>guest 
		ok</I
></TT
></A
>.</P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="QUEUEPAUSECOMMAND"
></A
>queuepause command (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter specifies the command to be 
		executed on the server host in order to pause the printer queue.</P
><P
>This command should be a program or script which takes 
		a printer name as its only parameter and stops the printer queue, 
		such that no longer jobs are submitted to the printer.</P
><P
>This command is not supported by Windows for Workgroups, 
		but can be issued from the Printers window under Windows 95 
		and NT.</P
><P
>If a <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>%p</I
></TT
> is given then the printer name 
		is put in its place. Otherwise it is placed at the end of the command.
		</P
><P
>Note that it is good practice to include the absolute 
		path in the command as the PATH may not be available to the 
		server.</P
><P
>Default: <EM
>depends on the setting of <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>printing
		</I
></TT
></EM
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>queuepause command = disable %p</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="QUEUERESUMECOMMAND"
></A
>queueresume command (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter specifies the command to be 
		executed on the server host in order to resume the printer queue. It 
 		is the command to undo the behavior that is caused by the 
		previous parameter (<A
HREF="#QUEUEPAUSECOMMAND"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		queuepause command</I
></TT
></A
>).</P
><P
>This command should be a program or script which takes 
		a printer name as its only parameter and resumes the printer queue, 
		such that queued jobs are resubmitted to the printer.</P
><P
>This command is not supported by Windows for Workgroups, 
		but can be issued from the Printers window under Windows 95 
		and NT.</P
><P
>If a <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>%p</I
></TT
> is given then the printer name 
		is put in its place. Otherwise it is placed at the end of the 
		command.</P
><P
>Note that it is good practice to include the absolute 
		path in the command as the PATH may not be available to the 
		server.</P
><P
>Default: <EM
>depends on the setting of <A
HREF="#PRINTING"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>printing</I
></TT
></A
></EM
>
		</P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>queuepause command = enable %p
		</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="READBMPX"
></A
>read bmpx (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This boolean parameter controls whether <A
HREF="smbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>smbd(8)</A
> will support the "Read 
		Block Multiplex" SMB. This is now rarely used and defaults to 
		<TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>no</TT
>. You should never need to set this 
		parameter.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>read bmpx = no</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="READLIST"
></A
>read list (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This is a list of users that are given read-only 
		access to a service. If the connecting user is in this list then 
		they will not be given write access, no matter what the <A
HREF="#READONLY"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>read only</I
></TT
></A
>
		option is set to. The list can include group names using the 
		syntax described in the <A
HREF="#INVALIDUSERS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		invalid users</I
></TT
></A
> parameter.</P
><P
>See also the <A
HREF="#WRITELIST"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		write list</I
></TT
></A
> parameter and the <A
HREF="#INVALIDUSERS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>invalid users</I
></TT
>
		</A
> parameter.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>read list = &#60;empty string&#62;</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>read list = mary, @students</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="READONLY"
></A
>read only (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>An inverted synonym is <A
HREF="#WRITEABLE"
>		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>writeable</I
></TT
></A
>.</P
><P
>If this parameter is <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>yes</TT
>, then users 
		of a service may not create or modify files in the service's 
		directory.</P
><P
>Note that a printable service (<B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>printable = yes</B
>)
		will <EM
>ALWAYS</EM
> allow writing to the directory 
		(user privileges permitting), but only via spooling operations.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>read only = yes</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="READRAW"
></A
>read raw (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter controls whether or not the server 
		will support the raw read SMB requests when transferring data 
		to clients.</P
><P
>If enabled, raw reads allow reads of 65535 bytes in 
		one packet. This typically provides a major performance benefit.
		</P
><P
>However, some clients either negotiate the allowable 
		block size incorrectly or are incapable of supporting larger block 
		sizes, and for these clients you may need to disable raw reads.</P
><P
>In general this parameter should be viewed as a system tuning 
		tool and left severely alone. See also <A
HREF="#WRITERAW"
>		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>write raw</I
></TT
></A
>.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>read raw = yes</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="READSIZE"
></A
>read size (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>The option <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>read size</I
></TT
> 
		affects the overlap of disk reads/writes with network reads/writes. 
		If the amount of data being transferred in several of the SMB 
		commands (currently SMBwrite, SMBwriteX and SMBreadbraw) is larger 
		than this value then the server begins writing the data before it 
		has received the whole packet from the network, or in the case of 
		SMBreadbraw, it begins writing to the network before all the data 
		has been read from disk.</P
><P
>This overlapping works best when the speeds of disk and 
		network access are similar, having very little effect when the 
		speed of one is much greater than the other.</P
><P
>The default value is 16384, but very little experimentation 
		has been done yet to determine the optimal value, and it is likely 
		that the best value will vary greatly between systems anyway. 
		A value over 65536 is pointless and will cause you to allocate 
		memory unnecessarily.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>read size = 16384</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>read size = 8192</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="REMOTEANNOUNCE"
></A
>remote announce (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This option allows you to setup <A
HREF="nmbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>nmbd(8)</A
> to periodically announce itself 
		to arbitrary IP addresses with an arbitrary workgroup name.</P
><P
>This is useful if you want your Samba server to appear 
		in a remote workgroup for which the normal browse propagation 
		rules don't work. The remote workgroup can be anywhere that you 
		can send IP packets to.</P
><P
>For example:</P
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>remote announce = 192.168.2.255/SERVERS 
		192.168.4.255/STAFF</B
></P
><P
>the above line would cause <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>nmbd</B
> to announce itself 
		to the two given IP addresses using the given workgroup names. 
		If you leave out the workgroup name then the one given in 
		the <A
HREF="#WORKGROUP"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>workgroup</I
></TT
></A
> 
		parameter is used instead.</P
><P
>The IP addresses you choose would normally be the broadcast 
		addresses of the remote networks, but can also be the IP addresses 
		of known browse masters if your network config is that stable.</P
><P
>See the documentation file <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>BROWSING.txt</TT
> 
		in the <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>docs/</TT
> directory.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>remote announce = &#60;empty string&#62;
		</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="REMOTEBROWSESYNC"
></A
>remote browse sync (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This option allows you to setup <A
HREF="nmbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>nmbd(8)</A
> to periodically request 
		synchronization of browse lists with the master browser of a Samba 
		server that is on a remote segment. This option will allow you to 
		gain browse lists for multiple workgroups across routed networks. This 
		is done in a manner that does not work with any non-Samba servers.</P
><P
>This is useful if you want your Samba server and all local 
		clients to appear in a remote workgroup for which the normal browse 
		propagation rules don't work. The remote workgroup can be anywhere 
		that you can send IP packets to.</P
><P
>For example:</P
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>remote browse sync = 192.168.2.255 192.168.4.255
		</B
></P
><P
>the above line would cause <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>nmbd</B
> to request 
		the master browser on the specified subnets or addresses to 
		synchronize their browse lists with the local server.</P
><P
>The IP addresses you choose would normally be the broadcast 
		addresses of the remote networks, but can also be the IP addresses 
		of known browse masters if your network config is that stable. If 
		a machine IP address is given Samba makes NO attempt to validate 
		that the remote machine is available, is listening, nor that it 
		is in fact the browse master on its segment.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>remote browse sync = &#60;empty string&#62;
		</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="RESTRICTANONYMOUS"
></A
>restrict anonymous (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This is a boolean parameter.  If it is <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>yes</TT
>, then 
		anonymous access to the server will be restricted, namely in the 
		case where the server is expecting the client to send a username, 
		but it doesn't.  Setting it to <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>yes</TT
> will force these anonymous 
 		connections to be denied, and the client will be required to always 
		supply a username and password when connecting. Use of this parameter 
		is only recommended for homogeneous NT client environments.</P
><P
>This parameter makes the use of macro expansions that rely
		on the username (%U, %G, etc) consistent.  NT 4.0 
		likes to use anonymous connections when refreshing the share list, 
		and this is a way to work around that.</P
><P
>When restrict anonymous is <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>yes</TT
>, all anonymous connections 
		are denied no matter what they are for.  This can effect the ability 
		of a machine to access the Samba Primary Domain Controller to revalidate 
		its machine account after someone else has logged on the client 
		interactively.  The NT client will display a message saying that 
		the machine's account in  the domain doesn't exist or the password is 
		bad.  The best way to deal  with this is to reboot NT client machines 
		between interactive logons,  using "Shutdown and Restart", rather 
		than "Close all programs and logon as a different user".</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>restrict anonymous = no</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="ROOT"
></A
>root (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>Synonym for <A
HREF="#ROOTDIRECTORY"
>		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>root directory"</I
></TT
></A
>.</P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="ROOTDIR"
></A
>root dir (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>Synonym for <A
HREF="#ROOTDIRECTORY"
>		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>root directory"</I
></TT
></A
>.</P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="ROOTDIRECTORY"
></A
>root directory (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>The server will <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>chroot()</B
> (i.e. 
		Change its root directory) to this directory on startup. This is 
		not strictly necessary for secure operation. Even without it the 
		server will deny access to files not in one of the service entries. 
		It may also check for, and deny access to, soft links to other 
		parts of the filesystem, or attempts to use ".." in file names 
		to access other directories (depending on the setting of the <A
HREF="#WIDELINKS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>wide links</I
></TT
></A
> 
		parameter).</P
><P
>Adding a <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>root directory</I
></TT
> entry other 
		than "/" adds an extra level of security, but at a price. It 
		absolutely ensures that no access is given to files not in the 
		sub-tree specified in the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>root directory</I
></TT
> 
		option, <EM
>including</EM
> some files needed for 
		complete operation of the server. To maintain full operability 
		of the server you will need to mirror some system files 
		into the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>root directory</I
></TT
> tree. In particular 
		you will need to mirror <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>/etc/passwd</TT
> (or a 
		subset of it), and any binaries or configuration files needed for 
		printing (if required). The set of files that must be mirrored is
		operating system dependent.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>root directory = /</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>root directory = /homes/smb</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="ROOTPOSTEXEC"
></A
>root postexec (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This is the same as the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>postexec</I
></TT
>
		parameter except that the command is run as root. This 
		is useful for unmounting filesystems 
		(such as CDROMs) after a connection is closed.</P
><P
>See also <A
HREF="#POSTEXEC"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		postexec</I
></TT
></A
>.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>root postexec = &#60;empty string&#62;
		</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="ROOTPREEXEC"
></A
>root preexec (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This is the same as the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>preexec</I
></TT
>
		parameter except that the command is run as root. This 
		is useful for mounting filesystems (such as CDROMs) when a 
		connection is opened.</P
><P
>See also <A
HREF="#PREEXEC"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		preexec</I
></TT
></A
> and <A
HREF="#PREEXECCLOSE"
>		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>preexec close</I
></TT
></A
>.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>root preexec = &#60;empty string&#62;
		</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="ROOTPREEXECCLOSE"
></A
>root preexec close (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This is the same as the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>preexec close
		</I
></TT
> parameter except that the command is run as root.</P
><P
>See also <A
HREF="#PREEXEC"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		preexec</I
></TT
></A
> and <A
HREF="#PREEXECCLOSE"
>		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>preexec close</I
></TT
></A
>.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>root preexec close = no</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="SECURITY"
></A
>security (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This option affects how clients respond to 
		Samba and is one of the most important settings in the <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>		smb.conf</TT
> file.</P
><P
>The option sets the "security mode bit" in replies to 
		protocol negotiations with <A
HREF="smbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>smbd(8)
		</A
> to turn share level security on or off. Clients decide 
		based on this bit whether (and how) to transfer user and password 
		information to the server.</P
><P
>The default is <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>security = user</B
>, as this is
		the most common setting needed when talking to Windows 98 and 
		Windows NT.</P
><P
>The alternatives are <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>security = share</B
>,
		<B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>security = server</B
> or <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>security = domain
		</B
>.</P
><P
>In versions of Samba prior to 2.0.0, the default was 
		<B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>security = share</B
> mainly because that was
		the only option at one stage.</P
><P
>There is a bug in WfWg that has relevance to this 
		setting. When in user or server level security a WfWg client 
		will totally ignore the password you type in the "connect 
		drive" dialog box. This makes it very difficult (if not impossible) 
		to connect to a Samba service as anyone except the user that 
		you are logged into WfWg as.</P
><P
>If your PCs use usernames that are the same as their 
		usernames on the UNIX machine then you will want to use 
 		<B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>security = user</B
>. If you mostly use usernames 
		that don't exist on the UNIX box then use <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>security = 
		share</B
>.</P
><P
>You should also use <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>security = share</B
> if you 
		want to mainly setup shares without a password (guest shares). This 
		is commonly used for a shared printer server. It is more difficult 
		to setup guest shares with <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>security = user</B
>, see 
		the <A
HREF="#MAPTOGUEST"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>map to guest</I
></TT
>
		</A
>parameter for details.</P
><P
>It is possible to use <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbd</B
> in a <EM
>		hybrid mode</EM
> where it is offers both user and share 
		level security under different <A
HREF="#NETBIOSALIASES"
>		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>NetBIOS aliases</I
></TT
></A
>. </P
><P
>The different settings will now be explained.</P
><P
><A
NAME="SECURITYEQUALSSHARE"
></A
><EM
>SECURITY = SHARE
		</EM
></P
><P
>When clients connect to a share level security server they 
		need not log onto the server with a valid username and password before 
		attempting to connect to a shared resource (although modern clients 
		such as Windows 95/98 and Windows NT will send a logon request with 
		a username but no password when talking to a <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>security = share
		</B
> server). Instead, the clients send authentication information 
		(passwords) on a per-share basis, at the time they attempt to connect 
		to that share.</P
><P
>Note that <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbd</B
> <EM
>ALWAYS</EM
> 
		uses a valid UNIX user to act on behalf of the client, even in
		<B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>security = share</B
> level security.</P
><P
>As clients are not required to send a username to the server
		in share level security, <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbd</B
> uses several
		techniques to determine the correct UNIX user to use on behalf
		of the client.</P
><P
>A list of possible UNIX usernames to match with the given
		client password is constructed using the following methods :</P
><P
></P
><UL
><LI
><P
>If the <A
HREF="#GUESTONLY"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>guest 
			only</I
></TT
></A
> parameter is set, then all the other 
			stages are missed and only the <A
HREF="#GUESTACCOUNT"
>			<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>guest account</I
></TT
></A
> username is checked.
			</P
></LI
><LI
><P
>Is a username is sent with the share connection 
			request, then this username (after mapping - see <A
HREF="#USERNAMEMAP"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>username map</I
></TT
></A
>), 
			is added as a potential username.</P
></LI
><LI
><P
>If the client did a previous <EM
>logon
			</EM
> request (the SessionSetup SMB call) then the 
			username sent in this SMB will be added as a potential username.
			</P
></LI
><LI
><P
>The name of the service the client requested is 
			added as a potential username.</P
></LI
><LI
><P
>The NetBIOS name of the client is added to 
			the list as a potential username.</P
></LI
><LI
><P
>Any users on the <A
HREF="#USER"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>			user</I
></TT
></A
> list are added as potential usernames.
			</P
></LI
></UL
><P
>If the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>guest only</I
></TT
> parameter is 
		not set, then this list is then tried with the supplied password. 
		The first user for whom the password matches will be used as the 
		UNIX user.</P
><P
>If the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>guest only</I
></TT
> parameter is 
		set, or no username can be determined then if the share is marked 
		as available to the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>guest account</I
></TT
>, then this 
		guest user will be used, otherwise access is denied.</P
><P
>Note that it can be <EM
>very</EM
> confusing 
		in share-level security as to which UNIX username will eventually
		be used in granting access.</P
><P
>See also the section <A
HREF="#AEN241"
>		NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION</A
>.</P
><P
><A
NAME="SECURITYEQUALSUSER"
></A
><EM
>SECURITY = USER
		</EM
></P
><P
>This is the default security setting in Samba 2.2. 
		With user-level security a client must first "log-on" with a 
		valid username and password (which can be mapped using the <A
HREF="#USERNAMEMAP"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>username map</I
></TT
></A
> 
		parameter). Encrypted passwords (see the <A
HREF="#ENCRYPTPASSWORDS"
>		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>encrypted passwords</I
></TT
></A
> parameter) can also
		be used in this security mode. Parameters such as <A
HREF="#USER"
>		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>user</I
></TT
></A
> and <A
HREF="#GUESTONLY"
>		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>guest only</I
></TT
></A
> if set	are then applied and 
		may change the UNIX user to use on this connection, but only after 
		the user has been successfully authenticated.</P
><P
><EM
>Note</EM
> that the name of the resource being 
		requested is <EM
>not</EM
> sent to the server until after 
		the server has successfully authenticated the client. This is why 
		guest shares don't work in user level security without allowing 
		the server to automatically map unknown users into the <A
HREF="#GUESTACCOUNT"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>guest account</I
></TT
></A
>. 
		See the <A
HREF="#MAPTOGUEST"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>map to guest</I
></TT
>
		</A
> parameter for details on doing this.</P
><P
>See also the section <A
HREF="#AEN241"
>		NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION</A
>.</P
><P
><A
NAME="SECURITYEQUALSSERVER"
></A
><EM
>SECURITY = SERVER
		</EM
></P
><P
>In this mode Samba will try to validate the username/password 
		by passing it to another SMB server, such as an NT box. If this 
		fails it will revert to <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>security = user</B
>, but note 
		that if encrypted passwords have been negotiated then Samba cannot 
		revert back to checking the UNIX password file, it must have a valid 
		<TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>smbpasswd</TT
> file to check users against. See the 
		documentation file in the <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>docs/</TT
> directory 
		<TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>ENCRYPTION.txt</TT
> for details on how to set this 
		up.</P
><P
><EM
>Note</EM
> that from the client's point of 
		view <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>security = server</B
> is the same as <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>		security = user</B
>.  It only affects how the server deals 
		with the authentication, it does not in any way affect what the 
		client sees.</P
><P
><EM
>Note</EM
> that the name of the resource being 
		requested is <EM
>not</EM
> sent to the server until after 
		the server has successfully authenticated the client. This is why 
		guest shares don't work in user level security without allowing 
		the server to automatically map unknown users into the <A
HREF="#GUESTACCOUNT"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>guest account</I
></TT
></A
>. 
		See the <A
HREF="#MAPTOGUEST"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>map to guest</I
></TT
>
		</A
> parameter for details on doing this.</P
><P
>See also the section <A
HREF="#AEN241"
>		NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION</A
>.</P
><P
>See also the <A
HREF="#PASSWORDSERVER"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>password 
		server</I
></TT
></A
> parameter and the <A
HREF="#ENCRYPTPASSWORDS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>encrypted passwords</I
></TT
>
		</A
> parameter.</P
><P
><A
NAME="SECURITYEQUALSDOMAIN"
></A
><EM
>SECURITY = DOMAIN
		</EM
></P
><P
>This mode will only work correctly if <A
HREF="smbpasswd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>smbpasswd(8)</A
> has been used to add this 
		machine into a Windows NT Domain. It expects the <A
HREF="#ENCRYPTPASSWORDS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>encrypted passwords</I
></TT
>
		</A
> parameter to be set to <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>yes</TT
>. In this 
		mode Samba will try to validate the username/password by passing
		it to a Windows NT Primary or Backup Domain Controller, in exactly 
		the same way that a Windows NT Server would do.</P
><P
><EM
>Note</EM
> that a valid UNIX user must still 
		exist as well as the account on the Domain Controller to allow 
		Samba to have a valid UNIX account to map file access to.</P
><P
><EM
>Note</EM
> that from the client's point 
		of view <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>security = domain</B
> is the same as <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>security = user
		</B
>. It only affects how the server deals with the authentication, 
		it does not in any way affect what the client sees.</P
><P
><EM
>Note</EM
> that the name of the resource being 
		requested is <EM
>not</EM
> sent to the server until after 
		the server has successfully authenticated the client. This is why 
		guest shares don't work in user level security without allowing 
		the server to automatically map unknown users into the <A
HREF="#GUESTACCOUNT"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>guest account</I
></TT
></A
>. 
		See the <A
HREF="#MAPTOGUEST"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>map to guest</I
></TT
>
		</A
> parameter for details on doing this.</P
><P
><EM
>BUG:</EM
> There is currently a bug in the 
		implementation of <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>security = domain</B
> with respect 
		to multi-byte character set usernames. The communication with a 
		Domain Controller must be done in UNICODE and Samba currently 
		does not widen multi-byte user names to UNICODE correctly, thus 
		a multi-byte username will not be recognized correctly at the 
		Domain Controller. This issue will be addressed in a future release.</P
><P
>See also the section <A
HREF="#AEN241"
>		NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION</A
>.</P
><P
>See also the <A
HREF="#PASSWORDSERVER"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>password 
		server</I
></TT
></A
> parameter and the <A
HREF="#ENCRYPTPASSWORDS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>encrypted passwords</I
></TT
>
		</A
> parameter.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>security = USER</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>security = DOMAIN</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="SECURITYMASK"
></A
>security mask (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter controls what UNIX permission 
		bits can be modified when a Windows NT client is manipulating 
		the UNIX permission on a file using the native NT security 
		dialog box.</P
><P
>This parameter is applied as a mask (AND'ed with) to 
		the changed permission bits, thus preventing any bits not in 
		this mask from being modified. Essentially, zero bits in this 
		mask may be treated as a set of bits the user is not allowed 
		to change.</P
><P
>If not set explicitly this parameter is 0777, allowing
		a user to modify all the user/group/world permissions on a file.
		</P
><P
><EM
>Note</EM
> that users who can access the 
		Samba server through other means can easily bypass this 
		restriction, so it is primarily useful for standalone 
		"appliance" systems.  Administrators of most normal systems will 
		probably want to leave it set to <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>0777</TT
>.</P
><P
>See also the <A
HREF="#FORCEDIRECTORYSECURITYMODE"
>		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>force directory security mode</I
></TT
></A
>, 
		<A
HREF="#DIRECTORYSECURITYMASK"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>directory 
		security mask</I
></TT
></A
>, <A
HREF="#FORCESECURITYMODE"
>		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>force security mode</I
></TT
></A
> parameters.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>security mask = 0777</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>security mask = 0770</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="SERVERSTRING"
></A
>server string (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This controls what string will show up in the 
		printer comment box in print manager and next to the IPC connection 
		in <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>net view</B
>. It can be any string that you wish 
		to show to your users.</P
><P
>It also sets what will appear in browse lists next 
		to the machine name.</P
><P
>A <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>%v</I
></TT
> will be replaced with the Samba 
		version number.</P
><P
>A <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>%h</I
></TT
> will be replaced with the 
		hostname.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>server string = Samba %v</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>server string = University of GNUs Samba 
		Server</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="SETDIRECTORY"
></A
>set directory (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>If <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>set directory = no</B
>, then 
		users of the service may not use the setdir command to change 
		directory.</P
><P
>The <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>setdir</B
> command is only implemented 
		in the Digital Pathworks client. See the Pathworks documentation 
		for details.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>set directory = no</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="SHAREMODES"
></A
>share modes (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This enables or disables the honoring of 
		the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>share modes</I
></TT
> during a file open. These 
		modes are used by clients to gain exclusive read or write access 
		to a file.</P
><P
>These open modes are not directly supported by UNIX, so
		they are simulated using shared memory, or lock files if your 
		UNIX doesn't support shared memory (almost all do).</P
><P
>The share modes that are enabled by this option are 
		<TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>DENY_DOS</TT
>, <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>DENY_ALL</TT
>,
		<TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>DENY_READ</TT
>, <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>DENY_WRITE</TT
>,
		<TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>DENY_NONE</TT
> and <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>DENY_FCB</TT
>.
		</P
><P
>This option gives full share compatibility and enabled 
		by default.</P
><P
>You should <EM
>NEVER</EM
> turn this parameter 
		off as many Windows applications will break if you do so.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>share modes = yes</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="SHORTPRESERVECASE"
></A
>short preserve case (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This boolean parameter controls if new files 
		which conform to 8.3 syntax, that is all in upper case and of 
		suitable length, are created upper case, or if they are forced 
		to be the <A
HREF="#DEFAULTCASE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>default case
		</I
></TT
></A
>. This  option can be use with <A
HREF="#PRESERVECASE"
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>preserve case = yes</B
>
		</A
> to permit long filenames to retain their case, while short 
		names are lowered. </P
><P
>See the section on <A
HREF="#AEN203"
>		NAME MANGLING</A
>.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>short preserve case = yes</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="SHOWADDPRINTERWIZARD"
></A
>show add printer wizard (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>With the introduction of MS-RPC based printing support
		for Windows NT/2000 client in Samba 2.2, a "Printers..." folder will 
		appear on Samba hosts in the share listing.  Normally this folder will 
		contain an icon for the MS Add Printer Wizard (APW).  However, it is 
		possible to disable this feature regardless of the level of privilege 
		of the connected user.</P
><P
>Under normal circumstances, the Windows NT/2000 client will 
		open a handle on the printer server with OpenPrinterEx() asking for
		Administrator privileges.  If the user does not have administrative
		access on the print server (i.e is not root or a member of the 
		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>printer admin</I
></TT
> group), the OpenPrinterEx() 
		call fails and the client makes another open call with a request for 
		a lower privilege level.  This should succeed, however the APW 
		icon will not be displayed.</P
><P
>Disabling the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>show add printer wizard</I
></TT
>
		parameter will always cause the OpenPrinterEx() on the server
		to fail.  Thus the APW icon will never be displayed. <EM
>		Note :</EM
>This does not prevent the same user from having 
		administrative privilege on an individual printer.</P
><P
>See also <A
HREF="#ADDPRINTERCOMMAND"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>addprinter
		command</I
></TT
></A
>, <A
HREF="#DELETEPRINTERCOMMAND"
>		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>deleteprinter command</I
></TT
></A
>, <A
HREF="#PRINTERADMIN"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>printer admin</I
></TT
></A
></P
><P
>Default :<B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>show add printer wizard = yes</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="SMBPASSWDFILE"
></A
>smb passwd file (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This option sets the path to the encrypted 
 		smbpasswd file.  By default the path to the smbpasswd file 
		is compiled into Samba.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smb passwd file = ${prefix}/private/smbpasswd
		</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smb passwd file = /etc/samba/smbpasswd
		</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="SOCKETADDRESS"
></A
>socket address (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This option allows you to control what 
		address Samba will listen for connections on. This is used to 
		support multiple virtual interfaces on the one server, each 
		with a different configuration.</P
><P
>By default Samba will accept connections on any 
		address.</P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>socket address = 192.168.2.20</B
>
		</P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="SOCKETOPTIONS"
></A
>socket options (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This option allows you to set socket options 
		to be used when talking with the client.</P
><P
>Socket options are controls on the networking layer 
		of the operating systems which allow the connection to be 
		tuned.</P
><P
>This option will typically be used to tune your Samba 
		server for optimal performance for your local network. There is 
		no way that Samba can know what the optimal parameters are for 
		your net, so you must experiment and choose them yourself. We 
		strongly suggest you read the appropriate documentation for your 
		operating system first (perhaps <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>man setsockopt</B
> 
		will help).</P
><P
>You may find that on some systems Samba will say 
		"Unknown socket option" when you supply an option. This means you 
		either incorrectly  typed it or you need to add an include file 
		to includes.h for your OS.  If the latter is the case please 
		send the patch to <A
HREF="mailto:samba@samba.org"
TARGET="_top"
>		samba@samba.org</A
>.</P
><P
>Any of the supported socket options may be combined 
		in any way you like, as long as your OS allows it.</P
><P
>This is the list of socket options currently settable 
		using this option:</P
><P
></P
><UL
><LI
><P
>SO_KEEPALIVE</P
></LI
><LI
><P
>SO_REUSEADDR</P
></LI
><LI
><P
>SO_BROADCAST</P
></LI
><LI
><P
>TCP_NODELAY</P
></LI
><LI
><P
>IPTOS_LOWDELAY</P
></LI
><LI
><P
>IPTOS_THROUGHPUT</P
></LI
><LI
><P
>SO_SNDBUF *</P
></LI
><LI
><P
>SO_RCVBUF *</P
></LI
><LI
><P
>SO_SNDLOWAT *</P
></LI
><LI
><P
>SO_RCVLOWAT *</P
></LI
></UL
><P
>Those marked with a <EM
>'*'</EM
> take an integer 
		argument. The others can optionally take a 1 or 0 argument to enable 
		or disable the option, by default they will be enabled if you 
		don't specify 1 or 0.</P
><P
>To specify an argument use the syntax SOME_OPTION = VALUE 
		for example <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>SO_SNDBUF = 8192</B
>. Note that you must 
		not have any spaces before or after the = sign.</P
><P
>If you are on a local network then a sensible option 
		might be</P
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>socket options = IPTOS_LOWDELAY</B
></P
><P
>If you have a local network then you could try:</P
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>socket options = IPTOS_LOWDELAY TCP_NODELAY</B
></P
><P
>If you are on a wide area network then perhaps try 
		setting IPTOS_THROUGHPUT. </P
><P
>Note that several of the options may cause your Samba 
		server to fail completely. Use these options with caution!</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>socket options = TCP_NODELAY</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>socket options = IPTOS_LOWDELAY</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="SOURCEENVIRONMENT"
></A
>source environment (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter causes Samba to set environment 
		variables as per the content of the file named.</P
><P
>If the value of this parameter starts with a "|" character 
		then Samba will treat that value as a pipe command to open and 
		will set the environment variables from the output of the pipe.</P
><P
>The contents of the file or the output of the pipe should 
		be formatted as the output of the standard Unix <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>env(1)
		</B
> command. This is of the form :</P
><P
>Example environment entry:</P
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>SAMBA_NETBIOS_NAME = myhostname</B
></P
><P
>Default: <EM
>No default value</EM
></P
><P
>Examples: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>source environment = |/etc/smb.conf.sh
		</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>source environment = 
		/usr/local/smb_env_vars</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="SSL"
></A
>ssl (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This 
		is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your 
		system and the configure option <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>--with-ssl</B
> was 
		given at configure time.</P
><P
>This variable enables or disables the entire SSL mode. If 
		it is set to <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>no</TT
>, the SSL-enabled Samba behaves 
		exactly like the non-SSL Samba. If set to <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>yes</TT
>, 
		it depends on the variables <A
HREF="#SSLHOSTS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		ssl hosts</I
></TT
></A
> and <A
HREF="#SSLHOSTSRESIGN"
>		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>ssl hosts resign</I
></TT
></A
> whether an SSL 
		connection will be required.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>ssl = no</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="SSLCACERTDIR"
></A
>ssl CA certDir (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This 
		is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your 
		system and the configure option <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>--with-ssl</B
> was 
		given at configure time.</P
><P
>This variable defines where to look up the Certification
		Authorities. The given directory should contain one file for 
		each CA that Samba will trust.  The file name must be the hash 
		value over the "Distinguished Name" of the CA. How this directory 
		is set up is explained later in this document. All files within the 
		directory that don't fit into this naming scheme are ignored. You 
		don't need this variable if you don't verify client certificates.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>ssl CA certDir = /usr/local/ssl/certs
		</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="SSLCACERTFILE"
></A
>ssl CA certFile (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This 
		is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your 
		system and the configure option <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>--with-ssl</B
> was 
		given at configure time.</P
><P
>This variable is a second way to define the trusted CAs. 
		The certificates of the trusted CAs are collected in one big 
		file and this variable points to the file. You will probably 
		only use one of the two ways to define your CAs. The first choice is 
		preferable if you have many CAs or want to be flexible, the second 
		is preferable if you only have one CA and want to keep things 
		simple (you won't need to create the hashed file names). You 
		don't need this variable if you don't verify client certificates.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>ssl CA certFile = /usr/local/ssl/certs/trustedCAs.pem
		</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="SSLCIPHERS"
></A
>ssl ciphers (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This 
		is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your 
		system and the configure option <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>--with-ssl</B
> was 
		given at configure time.</P
><P
>This variable defines the ciphers that should be offered 
		during SSL negotiation. You should not set this variable unless 
		you know what you are doing.</P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="SSLCLIENTCERT"
></A
>ssl client cert (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This 
		is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your 
		system and the configure option <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>--with-ssl</B
> was 
		given at configure time.</P
><P
>The certificate in this file is used by <A
HREF="smbclient.1.html"
TARGET="_top"
>		<B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbclient(1)</B
></A
> if it exists. It's needed 
		if the server requires a client certificate.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>ssl client cert = /usr/local/ssl/certs/smbclient.pem
		</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="SSLCLIENTKEY"
></A
>ssl client key (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This 
		is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your 
		system and the configure option <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>--with-ssl</B
> was 
		given at configure time.</P
><P
>This is the private key for <A
HREF="smbclient.1.html"
TARGET="_top"
>		<B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbclient(1)</B
></A
>. It's only needed if the 
		client should have a certificate. </P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>ssl client key = /usr/local/ssl/private/smbclient.pem
		</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="SSLCOMPATIBILITY"
></A
>ssl compatibility (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This 
		is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your 
		system and the configure option <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>--with-ssl</B
> was 
		given at configure time.</P
><P
>This variable defines whether OpenSSL should be configured 
		for bug compatibility with other SSL implementations. This is 
		probably not desirable because currently no clients with SSL 
		implementations other than OpenSSL exist.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>ssl compatibility = no</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="SSLEGDSOCKET"
></A
>ssl egd socket (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This 
		is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your 
		system and the configure option <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>--with-ssl</B
> was 
		given at configure time.</P
><P
>		This option is used to define the location of the communiation socket of 
		an EGD or PRNGD daemon, from which entropy can be retrieved. This option 
		can be used instead of or together with the <A
HREF="#SSLENTROPYFILE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>ssl entropy file</I
></TT
></A
> 
		directive. 255 bytes of entropy will be retrieved from the daemon.
		</P
><P
>Default: <EM
>none</EM
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="SSLENTROPYBYTES"
></A
>ssl entropy bytes (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This 
		is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your 
		system and the configure option <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>--with-ssl</B
> was 
		given at configure time.</P
><P
>		This parameter is used to define the number of bytes which should 
		be read from the <A
HREF="#SSLENTROPYFILE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>ssl entropy 
		file</I
></TT
></A
> If a -1 is specified, the entire file will
		be read.
		</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>ssl entropy bytes = 255</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="SSLENTROPYFILE"
></A
>ssl entropy file (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This 
		is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your 
		system and the configure option <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>--with-ssl</B
> was 
		given at configure time.</P
><P
>		This parameter is used to specify a file from which processes will 
		read "random bytes" on startup.  In order to seed the internal pseudo 
		random number generator, entropy must be provided. On system with a 
		<TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>/dev/urandom</TT
> device file, the processes
		will retrieve its entropy from the kernel. On systems without kernel
		entropy support, a file can be supplied that will be read on startup
		and that will be used to seed the PRNG.
		</P
><P
>Default: <EM
>none</EM
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="SSLHOSTS"
></A
>ssl hosts (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>See <A
HREF="#SSLHOSTSRESIGN"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		ssl hosts resign</I
></TT
></A
>.</P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="SSLHOSTSRESIGN"
></A
>ssl hosts resign (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This 
		is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your 
		system and the configure option <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>--with-ssl</B
> was 
		given at configure time.</P
><P
>These two variables define whether Samba will go 
		into SSL mode or not. If none of them is defined, Samba will 
		allow only SSL connections. If the <A
HREF="#SSLHOSTS"
>		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>ssl hosts</I
></TT
></A
> variable lists
		hosts (by IP-address, IP-address range, net group or name), 
		only these hosts will be forced into SSL mode. If the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		ssl hosts resign</I
></TT
> variable lists hosts, only these 
		hosts will <EM
>NOT</EM
> be forced into SSL mode. The syntax for these two 
		variables is the same as for the <A
HREF="#HOSTSALLOW"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		hosts allow</I
></TT
></A
> and <A
HREF="#HOSTSDENY"
>		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>hosts deny</I
></TT
></A
> pair of variables, only 
		that the subject of the decision is different: It's not the access 
		right but whether SSL is used or not. </P
><P
>The example below requires SSL connections from all hosts
		outside the local net (which is 192.168.*.*).</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>ssl hosts = &#60;empty string&#62;</B
></P
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>ssl hosts resign = &#60;empty string&#62;</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>ssl hosts resign = 192.168.</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="SSLREQUIRECLIENTCERT"
></A
>ssl require clientcert (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This 
		is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your 
		system and the configure option <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>--with-ssl</B
> was 
		given at configure time.</P
><P
>If this variable is set to <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>yes</TT
>, the 
		server will not tolerate connections from clients that don't 
		have a valid certificate. The directory/file given in <A
HREF="#SSLCACERTDIR"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>ssl CA certDir</I
></TT
>
		</A
> and <A
HREF="#SSLCACERTFILE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>ssl CA certFile
		</I
></TT
></A
> will be used to look up the CAs that issued 
		the client's certificate. If the certificate can't be verified 
		positively, the connection will be terminated.  If this variable 
		is set to <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>no</TT
>, clients don't need certificates. 
		Contrary to web applications you really <EM
>should</EM
> 
		require client certificates. In the web environment the client's 
		data is sensitive (credit card numbers) and the server must prove 
		to be trustworthy. In a file server environment the server's data 
		will be sensitive and the clients must prove to be trustworthy.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>ssl require clientcert = no</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="SSLREQUIRESERVERCERT"
></A
>ssl require servercert (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This 
		is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your 
		system and the configure option <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>--with-ssl</B
> was 
		given at configure time.</P
><P
>If this variable is set to <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>yes</TT
>, the 
		<A
HREF="smbclient.1.html"
TARGET="_top"
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbclient(1)</B
>
		</A
> will request a certificate from the server. Same as 
		<A
HREF="#SSLREQUIRECLIENTCERT"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>ssl require 
		clientcert</I
></TT
></A
> for the server.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>ssl require servercert = no</B
>
		</P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="SSLSERVERCERT"
></A
>ssl server cert (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This 
		is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your 
		system and the configure option <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>--with-ssl</B
> was 
		given at configure time.</P
><P
>This is the file containing the server's certificate. 
		The server <EM
>must</EM
> have a certificate. The 
		file may also contain the server's private key. See later for 
		how certificates and private keys are created.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>ssl server cert = &#60;empty string&#62;
		</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="SSLSERVERKEY"
></A
>ssl server key (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This 
		is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your 
		system and the configure option <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>--with-ssl</B
> was 
		given at configure time.</P
><P
>This file contains the private key of the server. If 
		this variable is not defined, the key is looked up in the 
		certificate file (it may be appended to the certificate). 
		The server <EM
>must</EM
> have a private key
		and the certificate <EM
>must</EM
> 
		match this private key.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>ssl server key = &#60;empty string&#62;
		</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="SSLVERSION"
></A
>ssl version (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This variable is part of SSL-enabled Samba. This 
		is only available if the SSL libraries have been compiled on your 
		system and the configure option <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>--with-ssl</B
> was 
		given at configure time.</P
><P
>This enumeration variable defines the versions of the 
		SSL protocol that will be used. <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>ssl2or3</TT
> allows 
		dynamic negotiation of SSL v2 or v3, <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>ssl2</TT
> results 
		in SSL v2, <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>ssl3</TT
> results in SSL v3 and
		<TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>tls1</TT
> results in TLS v1. TLS (Transport Layer 
		Security) is the new standard for SSL.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>ssl version = "ssl2or3"</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="STATCACHE"
></A
>stat cache (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter determines if <A
HREF="smbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>smbd(8)</A
> will use a cache in order to 
		speed up case insensitive name mappings. You should never need 
		to change this parameter.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>stat cache = yes</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="STATCACHESIZE"
></A
>stat cache size (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter determines the number of 
		entries in the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>stat cache</I
></TT
>.  You should 
		never need to change this parameter.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>stat cache size = 50</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="STATUS"
></A
>status (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This enables or disables logging of connections 
		to a status file that <A
HREF="smbstatus.1.html"
TARGET="_top"
>smbstatus(1)</A
>
		can read.</P
><P
>With this disabled <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbstatus</B
> won't be able
		to tell you what connections are active. You should never need to
		change this parameter.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>status = yes</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="STRICTALLOCATE"
></A
>strict allocate (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This is a boolean that controls the handling of 
		disk space allocation in the server. When this is set to <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>yes</TT
> 
		the server will change from UNIX behaviour of not committing real
		disk storage blocks when a file is extended to the Windows behaviour
		of actually forcing the disk system to allocate real storage blocks
		when a file is created or extended to be a given size. In UNIX
		terminology this means that Samba will stop creating sparse files.
		This can be slow on some systems.</P
><P
>When strict allocate is <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>no</TT
> the server does sparse
		disk block allocation when a file is extended.</P
><P
>Setting this to <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>yes</TT
> can help Samba return
		out of quota messages on systems that are restricting the disk quota
		of users.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>strict allocate = no</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="STRICTLOCKING"
></A
>strict locking (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This is a boolean that controls the handling of 
		file locking in the server. When this is set to <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>yes</TT
> 
		the server will check every read and write access for file locks, and 
		deny access if locks exist. This can be slow on some systems.</P
><P
>When strict locking is <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>no</TT
> the server does file 
		lock checks only when the client explicitly asks for them.</P
><P
>Well-behaved clients always ask for lock checks when it 
		is important, so in the vast majority of cases <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>strict 
		locking = no</B
> is preferable.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>strict locking = no</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="STRICTSYNC"
></A
>strict sync (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>Many Windows applications (including the Windows 
		98 explorer shell) seem to confuse flushing buffer contents to 
		disk with doing a sync to disk. Under UNIX, a sync call forces 
		the process to be suspended until the kernel has ensured that 
		all outstanding data in kernel disk buffers has been safely stored 
		onto stable storage. This is very slow and should only be done 
		rarely. Setting this parameter to <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>no</TT
> (the 
		default) means that <A
HREF="smbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>smbd</A
> ignores the Windows applications requests for
		a sync call. There is only a possibility of losing data if the
		operating system itself that Samba is running on crashes, so there is
		little danger in this default setting. In addition, this fixes many
		performance problems that people have reported with the new Windows98
		explorer shell file copies.</P
><P
>See also the <A
HREF="#SYNCALWAYS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>sync 
		always&#62;</I
></TT
></A
> parameter.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>strict sync = no</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="STRIPDOT"
></A
>strip dot (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter is now unused in Samba (2.2.5 and above).
		It used strip trailing dots off UNIX filenames but was not correctly implmented.
		In Samba 2.2.5 and above UNIX filenames ending in a dot are invalid Windows long
		filenames (as they are in Windows NT and above) and are mangled to 8.3 before
		being returned to a client.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>strip dot = no</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="SYNCALWAYS"
></A
>sync always (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This is a boolean parameter that controls 
		whether writes will always be written to stable storage before 
		the write call returns. If this is <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>no</TT
> then the server will be 
		guided by the client's request in each write call (clients can 
		set a bit indicating that a particular write should be synchronous). 
		If this is <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>yes</TT
> then every write will be followed by a <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>fsync()
		</B
> call to ensure the data is written to disk. Note that 
		the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>strict sync</I
></TT
> parameter must be set to
		<TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>yes</TT
> in order for this parameter to have 
		any affect.</P
><P
>See also the <A
HREF="#STRICTSYNC"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>strict 
		sync</I
></TT
></A
> parameter.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>sync always = no</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="SYSLOG"
></A
>syslog (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter maps how Samba debug messages 
		are logged onto the system syslog logging levels. Samba debug 
		level zero maps onto syslog <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>LOG_ERR</TT
>, debug 
		level one maps onto <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>LOG_WARNING</TT
>, debug level 
		two maps onto <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>LOG_NOTICE</TT
>, debug level three 
		maps onto LOG_INFO. All higher levels are mapped to <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>		LOG_DEBUG</TT
>.</P
><P
>This parameter sets the threshold for sending messages 
		to syslog.  Only messages with debug level less than this value 
		will be sent to syslog.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>syslog = 1</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="SYSLOGONLY"
></A
>syslog only (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>If this parameter is set then Samba debug 
		messages are logged into the system syslog only, and not to 
		the debug log files.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>syslog only = no</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="TEMPLATEHOMEDIR"
></A
>template homedir (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>When filling out the user information for a Windows NT 
		user, the <A
HREF="winbindd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>winbindd(8)</A
> daemon 
		uses this parameter to fill in the home directory for that user.  
		If the string <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>%D</I
></TT
> is present it is substituted 
		with the user's Windows NT domain name.  If the string <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>%U
		</I
></TT
> is present it is substituted with the user's Windows 
		NT user name.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>template homedir = /home/%D/%U</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="TEMPLATESHELL"
></A
>template shell (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>When filling out the user information for a Windows NT 
		user, the <A
HREF="winbindd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>winbindd(8)</A
> daemon 
		uses this parameter to fill in the login shell for that user.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>template shell = /bin/false</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="TIMEOFFSET"
></A
>time offset (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter is a setting in minutes to add 
		to the normal GMT to local time conversion. This is useful if 
		you are serving a lot of PCs that have incorrect daylight 
		saving time handling.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>time offset = 0</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>time offset = 60</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="TIMESERVER"
></A
>time server (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter determines if <A
HREF="nmbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
> 			
		nmbd(8)</A
> advertises itself as a time server to Windows 
		clients.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>time server = no</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="TIMESTAMPLOGS"
></A
>timestamp logs (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>Synonym for <A
HREF="#DEBUGTIMESTAMP"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		debug timestamp</I
></TT
></A
>.</P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="TOTALPRINTJOBS"
></A
>total print jobs (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter accepts an integer value which defines
		a limit on the maximum number of print jobs that will be accepted 
		system wide at any given time.  If a print job is submitted
		by a client which will exceed this number, then <A
HREF="smbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>smbd</A
> will return an 
		error indicating that no space is available on the server.  The 
		default value of 0 means that no such limit exists.  This parameter
		can be used to prevent a server from exceeding its capacity and is
		designed as a printing throttle.  See also 
		<A
HREF="#MAXPRINTJOBS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>max print jobs</I
></TT
></A
>.
		</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>total print jobs = 0</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>total print jobs = 5000</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="UNIXEXTENSIONS"
></A
>unix extensions(G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This boolean parameter controls whether Samba 
		implments the CIFS UNIX extensions, as defined by HP. 
		These extensions enable Samba to better serve UNIX CIFS clients
		by supporting features such as symbolic links, hard links, etc...
		These extensions require a similarly enabled client, and are of
		no current use to Windows clients.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>unix extensions = no</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="UNIXPASSWORDSYNC"
></A
>unix password sync (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This boolean parameter controls whether Samba 
		attempts to synchronize the UNIX password with the SMB password 
		when the encrypted SMB password in the smbpasswd file is changed. 
		If this is set to <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>yes</TT
> the program specified in the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>passwd
		program</I
></TT
>parameter is called <EM
>AS ROOT</EM
> - 
		to allow the new UNIX password to be set without access to the 
		old UNIX password (as the SMB password change code has no 
		access to the old password cleartext, only the new).</P
><P
>See also <A
HREF="#PASSWDPROGRAM"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>passwd 
		program</I
></TT
></A
>, <A
HREF="#PASSWDCHAT"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		passwd chat</I
></TT
></A
>.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>unix password sync = no</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="UPDATEENCRYPTED"
></A
>update encrypted (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This boolean parameter allows a user logging 
		on with a plaintext password to have their encrypted (hashed) 
		password in the smbpasswd file to be updated automatically as 
		they log on. This option allows a site to migrate from plaintext 
		password authentication (users authenticate with plaintext 
		password over the wire, and are checked against a UNIX account 
		database) to encrypted password authentication (the SMB 
		challenge/response authentication mechanism) without forcing
		all users to re-enter their passwords via smbpasswd at the time the
		change is made. This is a convenience option to allow the change over
		to encrypted passwords to be made over a longer period. Once all users
		have encrypted representations of their passwords in the smbpasswd
		file this parameter should be set to <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>no</TT
>.</P
><P
>In order for this parameter to work correctly the <A
HREF="#ENCRYPTPASSWORDS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>encrypt passwords</I
></TT
>
		</A
> parameter must be set to <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>no</TT
> when
		this parameter is set to <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>yes</TT
>.</P
><P
>Note that even when this parameter is set a user 
		authenticating to <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbd</B
> must still enter a valid 
		password in order to connect correctly, and to update their hashed 
		(smbpasswd) passwords.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>update encrypted = no</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="USECLIENTDRIVER"
></A
>use client driver (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter applies only to Windows NT/2000
		clients.  It has no affect on Windows 95/98/ME clients.  When 
		serving a printer to Windows NT/2000 clients without first installing
		a valid printer driver on the Samba host, the client will be required
		to install a local printer driver.  From this point on, the client
		will treat the print as a local printer and not a network printer 
		connection.  This is much the same behavior that will occur
		when <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>disable spoolss = yes</B
>.  </P
><P
>The differentiating 
		factor is that under normal circumstances, the NT/2000 client will 
		attempt to open the network printer using MS-RPC.  The problem is that
		because the client considers the printer to be local, it will attempt
		to issue the OpenPrinterEx() call requesting access rights associated 
		with the logged on user. If the user possesses local administator rights
		but not root privilegde on the Samba host (often the case), the OpenPrinterEx()
		call will fail.  The result is that the client will now display an "Access
		Denied; Unable to connect" message in the printer queue window (even though
		jobs may successfully be printed).  </P
><P
>If this parameter is enabled for a printer, then any attempt
		to open the printer with the PRINTER_ACCESS_ADMINISTER right is mapped
		to PRINTER_ACCESS_USE instead.  Thus allowing the OpenPrinterEx()
		call to succeed.  <EM
>This parameter MUST not be able enabled
		on a print share which has valid print driver installed on the Samba 
		server.</EM
></P
><P
>See also <A
HREF="#DISABLESPOOLSS"
>disable spoolss</A
>
		</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>use client driver = no</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="USEMMAP"
></A
>use mmap (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This global parameter determines if the tdb internals of Samba can
		depend on mmap working correctly on the running system. Samba requires a coherent
		mmap/read-write system memory cache. Currently only HPUX does not have such a
		coherent cache, and so this parameter is set to <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>no</TT
> by
		default on HPUX. On all other systems this parameter should be left alone. This
		parameter is provided to help the Samba developers track down problems with
		the tdb internal code.
		</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>use mmap = yes</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="USERHOSTS"
></A
>use rhosts (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>If this global parameter is <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>yes</TT
>, it specifies 
		that the UNIX user's <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>.rhosts</TT
> file in their home directory 
		will be read to find the names of hosts and users who will be allowed 
		access without specifying a password.</P
><P
><EM
>NOTE:</EM
> The use of <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>use rhosts
		</I
></TT
> can be a major security hole. This is because you are 
		trusting the PC to supply the correct username. It is very easy to 
		get a PC to supply a false username. I recommend that the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		use rhosts</I
></TT
> option be only used if you really know what 
		you are doing.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>use rhosts = no</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="USER"
></A
>user (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>Synonym for <A
HREF="#USERNAME"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		username</I
></TT
></A
>.</P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="USERS"
></A
>users (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>Synonym for <A
HREF="#USERNAME"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		username</I
></TT
></A
>.</P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="USERNAME"
></A
>username (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>Multiple users may be specified in a comma-delimited 
		list, in which case the supplied password will be tested against 
		each username in turn (left to right).</P
><P
>The <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>username</I
></TT
> line is needed only when 
		the PC is unable to supply its own username. This is the case 
		for the COREPLUS protocol or where your users have different WfWg 
		usernames to UNIX usernames. In both these cases you may also be 
		better using the \\server\share%user syntax instead.</P
><P
>The <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>username</I
></TT
> line is not a great 
		solution in many cases as it means Samba will try to validate 
		the supplied password against each of the usernames in the 
		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>username</I
></TT
> line in turn. This is slow and 
		a bad idea for lots of users in case of duplicate passwords. 
		You may get timeouts or security breaches using this parameter 
		unwisely.</P
><P
>Samba relies on the underlying UNIX security. This 
		parameter does not restrict who can login, it just offers hints 
		to the Samba server as to what usernames might correspond to the 
		supplied password. Users can login as whoever they please and 
		they will be able to do no more damage than if they started a 
		telnet session. The daemon runs as the user that they log in as, 
		so they cannot do anything that user cannot do.</P
><P
>To restrict a service to a particular set of users you 
		can use the <A
HREF="#VALIDUSERS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>valid users
		</I
></TT
></A
> parameter.</P
><P
>If any of the usernames begin with a '@' then the name
		will be looked up first in the NIS netgroups list (if Samba 
		is compiled with netgroup support), followed by a lookup in 
		the UNIX groups database and will expand to a list of all users 
		in the group of that name.</P
><P
>If any of the usernames begin with a '+' then the name 
		will be looked up only in the UNIX groups database and will 
		expand to a list of all users in the group of that name.</P
><P
>If any of the usernames begin with a '&#38;'then the name 
		will be looked up only in the NIS netgroups database (if Samba 
		is compiled with netgroup support) and will expand to a list 
		of all users in the netgroup group of that name.</P
><P
>Note that searching though a groups database can take 
		quite some time, and some clients may time out during the 
		search.</P
><P
>See the section <A
HREF="#AEN241"
>NOTE ABOUT 
		USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION</A
> for more information on how 
		this parameter determines access to the services.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>The guest account if a guest service, 
		else &#60;empty string&#62;.</B
></P
><P
>Examples:<B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>username = fred, mary, jack, jane, 
		@users, @pcgroup</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="USERNAMELEVEL"
></A
>username level (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This option helps Samba to try and 'guess' at 
		the real UNIX username, as many DOS clients send an all-uppercase 
		username. By default Samba tries all lowercase, followed by the 
		username with the first letter capitalized, and fails if the 
		username is not found on the UNIX machine.</P
><P
>If this parameter is set to non-zero the behavior changes. 
		This parameter is a number that specifies the number of uppercase
		combinations to try while trying to determine the UNIX user name. The
		higher the number the more combinations will be tried, but the slower
		the discovery of usernames will be. Use this parameter when you have
		strange usernames on your UNIX machine, such as <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>AstrangeUser
		</TT
>.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>username level = 0</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>username level = 5</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="USERNAMEMAP"
></A
>username map (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This option allows you to specify a file containing 
		a mapping of usernames from the clients to the server. This can be 
		used for several purposes. The most common is to map usernames 
		that users use on DOS or Windows machines to those that the UNIX 
		box uses. The other is to map multiple users to a single username 
		so that they can more easily share files.</P
><P
>The map file is parsed line by line. Each line should 
		contain a single UNIX username on the left then a '=' followed 
		by a list of usernames on the right. The list of usernames on the 
		right may contain names of the form @group in which case they 
		will match any UNIX username in that group. The special client 
		name '*' is a wildcard and matches any name. Each line of the 
		map file may be up to 1023 characters long.</P
><P
>The file is processed on each line by taking the 
		supplied username and comparing it with each username on the right 
		hand side of the '=' signs. If the supplied name matches any of 
		the names on the right hand side then it is replaced with the name 
		on the left. Processing then continues with the next line.</P
><P
>If any line begins with a '#' or a ';' then it is 
		ignored</P
><P
>If any line begins with an '!' then the processing 
		will stop after that line if a mapping was done by the line. 
		Otherwise mapping continues with every line being processed. 
		Using '!' is most useful when you have a wildcard mapping line 
		later in the file.</P
><P
>For example to map from the name <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>admin</TT
> 
		or <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>administrator</TT
> to the UNIX name <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>		root</TT
> you would use:</P
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>root = admin administrator</B
></P
><P
>Or to map anyone in the UNIX group <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>system</TT
> 
		to the UNIX name <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>sys</TT
> you would use:</P
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>sys = @system</B
></P
><P
>You can have as many mappings as you like in a username 
		map file.</P
><P
>If your system supports the NIS NETGROUP option then 
		the netgroup database is checked before the <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>/etc/group
		</TT
> database for matching groups.</P
><P
>You can map Windows usernames that have spaces in them
		 by using double quotes around the name. For example:</P
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>tridge = "Andrew Tridgell"</B
></P
><P
>would map the windows username "Andrew Tridgell" to the 
		unix username "tridge".</P
><P
>The following example would map mary and fred to the 
		unix user sys, and map the rest to guest. Note the use of the 
		'!' to tell Samba to stop processing if it gets a match on 
		that line.</P
><P
><TABLE
BORDER="0"
BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
WIDTH="90%"
><TR
><TD
><PRE
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
>		!sys = mary fred
		guest = *
		</PRE
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
></P
><P
>Note that the remapping is applied to all occurrences 
		of usernames. Thus if you connect to \\server\fred and <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>		fred</TT
> is remapped to <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>mary</TT
> then you 
		will actually be connecting to \\server\mary and will need to 
		supply a password suitable for <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>mary</TT
> not 
		<TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>fred</TT
>. The only exception to this is the 
		username passed to the <A
HREF="#PASSWORDSERVER"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		password server</I
></TT
></A
> (if you have one). The password 
		server will receive whatever username the client supplies without 
		modification.</P
><P
>Also note that no reverse mapping is done. The main effect 
		this has is with printing. Users who have been mapped may have 
		trouble deleting print jobs as PrintManager under WfWg will think 
		they don't own the print job.</P
><P
>Default: <EM
>no username map</EM
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>username map = /usr/local/samba/lib/users.map
		</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="USESENDFILE"
></A
>use sendfile (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>If this parameter is <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>yes</TT
>, and Samba
		was built with the --with-sendfile-support option, and the underlying operating
		system supports sendfile system call, then some SMB read calls (mainly ReadAndX
		and ReadRaw) will use the more efficient sendfile system call for files that
		are exclusively oplocked. This may make more efficient use of the system CPU's
		and cause Samba to be faster. This is off by default as it's effects are unknown
		as yet.
		</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>use sendfile = no</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="UTMP"
></A
>utmp (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This boolean parameter is only available if 
		Samba has been configured and compiled  with the option <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>		--with-utmp</B
>. If set to <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>yes</TT
> then Samba will attempt
		to add utmp or utmpx records (depending on the UNIX system) whenever a
		connection is made to a Samba server. Sites may use this to record the
		user connecting to a Samba share.</P
><P
>See also the <A
HREF="#UTMPDIRECTORY"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		utmp directory</I
></TT
></A
> parameter.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>utmp = no</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="UTMPDIRECTORY"
></A
>utmp directory(G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter is only available if Samba has 
		been configured and compiled with the option <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>		--with-utmp</B
>. It specifies a directory pathname that is
		used to store the utmp or utmpx files (depending on the UNIX system) that
		record user connections to a Samba server. See also the <A
HREF="#UTMP"
>		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>utmp</I
></TT
></A
> parameter. By default this is 
		not set, meaning the system will use whatever utmp file the 
		native system is set to use (usually 
		<TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>/var/run/utmp</TT
> on Linux).</P
><P
>Default: <EM
>no utmp directory</EM
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="VALIDCHARS"
></A
>valid chars (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>The option allows you to specify additional 
		characters that should be considered valid by the server in 
		filenames. This is particularly useful for national character 
		sets, such as adding u-umlaut or a-ring.</P
><P
>The option takes a list of characters in either integer 
		or character form with spaces between them. If you give two 
		characters with a colon between them then it will be taken as 
		an lowercase:uppercase pair.</P
><P
>If you have an editor capable of entering the characters 
		into the config file then it is probably easiest to use this 
		method. Otherwise you can specify the characters in octal, 
		decimal or hexadecimal form using the usual C notation.</P
><P
>For example to add the single character 'Z' to the charset 
		(which is a pointless thing to do as it's already there) you could 
		do one of the following</P
><P
><TABLE
BORDER="0"
BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
WIDTH="90%"
><TR
><TD
><PRE
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
>		valid chars = Z
		valid chars = z:Z
		valid chars = 0132:0172
		</PRE
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
></P
><P
>The last two examples above actually add two characters, 
		and alter the uppercase and lowercase mappings appropriately.</P
><P
>Note that you <EM
>MUST</EM
> specify this parameter 
		after the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>client code page</I
></TT
> parameter if you 
		have both set. If <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>client code page</I
></TT
> is set after 
		the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>valid chars</I
></TT
> parameter the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>valid 
		chars</I
></TT
> settings will be overwritten.</P
><P
>See also the <A
HREF="#CLIENTCODEPAGE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>client 
		code page</I
></TT
></A
> parameter.</P
><P
>Default: <EM
>Samba defaults to using a reasonable set 
		of valid characters for English systems</EM
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>valid chars = 0345:0305 0366:0326 0344:0304
		</B
></P
><P
>The above example allows filenames to have the Swedish 
		characters in them.</P
><P
><EM
>NOTE:</EM
> It is actually quite difficult to 
		correctly produce a <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>valid chars</I
></TT
> line for 
		a particular system. To automate the process <A
HREF="mailto:tino@augsburg.net"
TARGET="_top"
>tino@augsburg.net</A
> has written 
		a package called <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>validchars</B
> which will automatically 
		produce a complete <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>valid chars</I
></TT
> line for
		a given client system. Look in the <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>examples/validchars/
		</TT
> subdirectory of your Samba source code distribution 
		for this package.</P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="VALIDUSERS"
></A
>valid users (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This is a list of users that should be allowed 
		to login to this service. Names starting with '@', '+' and  '&#38;'
		are interpreted using the same rules as described in the 
		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>invalid users</I
></TT
> parameter.</P
><P
>If this is empty (the default) then any user can login. 
		If a username is in both this list and the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>invalid 
		users</I
></TT
> list then access is denied for that user.</P
><P
>The current servicename is substituted for <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>%S
		</I
></TT
>. This is useful in the [homes] section.</P
><P
>See also <A
HREF="#INVALIDUSERS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>invalid users
		</I
></TT
></A
></P
><P
>Default: <EM
>No valid users list (anyone can login)
		</EM
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>valid users = greg, @pcusers</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="VETOFILES"
></A
>veto files(S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This is a list of files and directories that 
		are neither visible nor accessible.  Each entry in the list must 
		be separated by a '/', which allows spaces to be included 
		in the entry. '*' and '?' can be used to specify multiple files 
		or directories as in DOS wildcards.</P
><P
>Each entry must be a unix path, not a DOS path and 
		must <EM
>not</EM
> include the  unix directory 
		separator '/'.</P
><P
>Note that the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>case sensitive</I
></TT
> option 
		is applicable in vetoing files.</P
><P
>One feature of the veto files parameter that it
		is important to be aware of is Samba's behaviour when
		trying to delete a directory. If a directory that is
		to be deleted contains nothing but veto files this
		deletion will <EM
>fail</EM
> unless you also set
		the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>delete veto files</I
></TT
> parameter to
		<TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>yes</I
></TT
>.</P
><P
>Setting this parameter will affect the performance 
		of Samba, as it will be forced to check all files and directories 
		for a match as they are scanned.</P
><P
>See also <A
HREF="#HIDEFILES"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>hide files
		</I
></TT
></A
> and <A
HREF="#CASESENSITIVE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		case sensitive</I
></TT
></A
>.</P
><P
>Default: <EM
>No files or directories are vetoed.
		</EM
></P
><P
>Examples:<TABLE
BORDER="0"
BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
WIDTH="90%"
><TR
><TD
><PRE
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
>; Veto any files containing the word Security, 
; any ending in .tmp, and any directory containing the
; word root.
veto files = /*Security*/*.tmp/*root*/

; Veto the Apple specific files that a NetAtalk server
; creates.
veto files = /.AppleDouble/.bin/.AppleDesktop/Network Trash Folder/</PRE
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="VETOOPLOCKFILES"
></A
>veto oplock files (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter is only valid when the <A
HREF="#OPLOCKS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>oplocks</I
></TT
></A
>
		parameter is turned on for a share. It allows the Samba administrator
		to selectively turn off the granting of oplocks on selected files that
		match a wildcarded list, similar to the wildcarded list used in the
		<A
HREF="#VETOFILES"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>veto files</I
></TT
></A
> 
		parameter.</P
><P
>Default: <EM
>No files are vetoed for oplock 
		grants</EM
></P
><P
>You might want to do this on files that you know will 
		be heavily contended for by clients. A good example of this 
		is in the NetBench SMB benchmark program, which causes heavy 
		client contention for files ending in <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>.SEM</TT
>. 
		To cause Samba not to grant oplocks on these files you would use 
		the line (either in the [global] section or in the section for 
		the particular NetBench share :</P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>veto oplock files = /*.SEM/
		</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="VFSOBJECT"
></A
>vfs object (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter specifies a shared object file that 
		is used for Samba VFS I/O operations.  By default, normal 
		disk I/O operations are used but these can be overloaded 
		with a VFS object.  The Samba VFS layer is new to Samba 2.2 and 
		must be enabled at compile time with --with-vfs.</P
><P
>Default : <EM
>no value</EM
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="VFSOPTIONS"
></A
>vfs options (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter allows parameters to be passed 
		to the vfs layer at initialization time.  The Samba VFS layer 
		is new to Samba 2.2 and must be enabled at compile time 
		with --with-vfs.  See also <A
HREF="#VFSOBJECT"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		vfs object</I
></TT
></A
>.</P
><P
>Default : <EM
>no value</EM
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="VOLUME"
></A
>volume (S)</DT
><DD
><P
> This allows you to override the volume label 
		returned for a share. Useful for CDROMs with installation programs 
		that insist on a particular volume label.</P
><P
>Default: <EM
>the name of the share</EM
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="WIDELINKS"
></A
>wide links (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter controls whether or not links 
		in the UNIX file system may be followed by the server. Links 
		that point to areas within the directory tree exported by the 
		server are always allowed; this parameter controls access only 
		to areas that are outside the directory tree being exported.</P
><P
>Note that setting this parameter can have a negative 
		effect on your server performance due to the extra system calls 
		that Samba has to  do in order to perform the link checks.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>wide links = yes</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="WINBINDCACHETIME"
></A
>winbind cache time (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter specifies the number of seconds the
		<A
HREF="winbindd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>winbindd(8)</A
> daemon will cache 
		user and group information before querying a Windows NT server 
		again.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>winbind cache type = 15</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="WINBINDENUMUSERS"
></A
>winbind enum users (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>On large installations using
		<A
HREF="winbindd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>winbindd(8)</A
> it may be
		necessary to suppress the enumeration of users through the
		<B
CLASS="COMMAND"
> setpwent()</B
>,
		<B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>getpwent()</B
> and
		<B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>endpwent()</B
> group of system calls.  If
		the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>winbind enum users</I
></TT
> parameter is
		<TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>no</TT
>, calls to the <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>getpwent</B
> system call
		will not return any data. </P
><P
><EM
>Warning:</EM
> Turning off user
		enumeration may cause some programs to behave oddly.  For
		example, the finger program relies on having access to the
		full user list when searching for matching
		usernames. </P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>winbind enum users = yes </B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="WINBINDENUMGROUPS"
></A
>winbind enum groups (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>On large installations using
		<A
HREF="winbindd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>winbindd(8)</A
> it may be
		necessary to suppress the enumeration of groups through the
		<B
CLASS="COMMAND"
> setgrent()</B
>,
		<B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>getgrent()</B
> and
		<B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>endgrent()</B
> group of system calls.  If
		the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>winbind enum groups</I
></TT
> parameter is
		<TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>no</TT
>, calls to the <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>getgrent()</B
> system
		call will not return any data. </P
><P
><EM
>Warning:</EM
> Turning off group
		enumeration may cause some programs to behave oddly.
		</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>winbind enum groups = yes </B
>
		</P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="WINBINDGID"
></A
>winbind gid (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>The winbind gid parameter specifies the range of group 
		ids that are allocated by the <A
HREF="winbindd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>		winbindd(8)</A
> daemon.  This range of group ids should have no 
		existing local or NIS groups within it as strange conflicts can 
		occur otherwise.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>winbind gid = &#60;empty string&#62;
		</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>winbind gid = 10000-20000</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="WINBINDSEPARATOR"
></A
>winbind separator (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter allows an admin to define the character 
		used when listing a username of the form of <TT
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>DOMAIN
		</I
></TT
>\<TT
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>user</I
></TT
>.  This parameter 
		is only applicable when using the <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>pam_winbind.so</TT
>
		and <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>nss_winbind.so</TT
> modules for UNIX services.
		</P
><P
>Please note that setting this parameter to + causes problems
		with group membership at least on glibc systems, as the character +
		is used as a special character for NIS in /etc/group.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>winbind separator = '\'</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>winbind separator = +</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="WINBINDUID"
></A
>winbind uid (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>The winbind gid parameter specifies the range of group 
		ids that are allocated by the <A
HREF="winbindd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>		winbindd(8)</A
> daemon.  This range of ids should have no 
		existing local or NIS users within it as strange conflicts can 
		occur otherwise.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>winbind uid = &#60;empty string&#62;
		</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>winbind uid = 10000-20000</B
></P
></DD
><DT
>winbind use default domain, <A
NAME="WINBINDUSEDEFAULTDOMAIN"
></A
>winbind use default domain</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter specifies whether the <A
HREF="winbindd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>		winbindd(8)</A
>
		daemon should operate on users without domain component in their username.  
                Users without a domain component are treated as is part of the winbindd server's 
                own domain.  While this does not benifit Windows users, it makes SSH, FTP and e-mail 
                function in a way much closer to the way they would in a native unix system.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>winbind use default domain = &#60;no&#62; 
		</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>winbind use default domain = yes</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="WINSHOOK"
></A
>wins hook (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>When Samba is running as a WINS server this 
		allows you to call an external program for all changes to the 
		WINS database. The primary use for this option is to allow the 
		dynamic update of external name resolution databases such as 
		dynamic DNS.</P
><P
>The wins hook parameter specifies the name of a script 
		or executable that will be called as follows:</P
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>wins_hook operation name nametype ttl IP_list
		</B
></P
><P
></P
><UL
><LI
><P
>The first argument is the operation and is one 
			of "add", "delete", or "refresh". In most cases the operation can 
			be ignored as the rest of the parameters provide sufficient 
			information. Note that "refresh" may sometimes be called when the 
			name has not previously been added, in that case it should be treated 
			as an add.</P
></LI
><LI
><P
>The second argument is the NetBIOS name. If the 
			name is not a legal name then the wins hook is not called. 
			Legal names contain only  letters, digits, hyphens, underscores 
			and periods.</P
></LI
><LI
><P
>The third argument is the NetBIOS name 
			type as a 2 digit hexadecimal number. </P
></LI
><LI
><P
>The fourth argument is the TTL (time to live) 
			for the name in seconds.</P
></LI
><LI
><P
>The fifth and subsequent arguments are the IP 
			addresses currently registered for that name. If this list is 
			empty then the name should be deleted.</P
></LI
></UL
><P
>An example script that calls the BIND dynamic DNS update 
		program <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>nsupdate</B
> is provided in the examples 
		directory of the Samba source code. </P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="WINSPROXY"
></A
>wins proxy (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This is a boolean that controls if <A
HREF="nmbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>nmbd(8)</A
> will respond to broadcast name 
		queries on behalf of  other hosts. You may need to set this 
		to <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>yes</TT
> for some older clients.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>wins proxy = no</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="WINSSERVER"
></A
>wins server (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This specifies the IP address (or DNS name: IP 
		address for preference) of the WINS server that <A
HREF="nmbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>		nmbd(8)</A
> should register with. If you have a WINS server on 
		your network then you should set this to the WINS server's IP.</P
><P
>You should point this at your WINS server if you have a
		multi-subnetted network.</P
><P
><EM
>NOTE</EM
>. You need to set up Samba to point 
		to a WINS server if you have multiple subnets and wish cross-subnet 
		browsing to work correctly.</P
><P
>See the documentation file <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>BROWSING.txt</TT
> 
		in the docs/ directory of your Samba source distribution.</P
><P
>Default: <EM
>not enabled</EM
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>wins server = 192.9.200.1</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="WINSSUPPORT"
></A
>wins support (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This boolean controls if the <A
HREF="nmbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
> 		
		nmbd(8)</A
> process in Samba will act as a WINS server. You should 
		not set this to <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>yes</TT
> unless you have a multi-subnetted network and 
		you wish a particular <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>nmbd</B
> to be your WINS server. 
		Note that you should <EM
>NEVER</EM
> set this to <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>yes</TT
>
		on more than one machine in your network.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>wins support = no</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="WORKGROUP"
></A
>workgroup (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This controls what workgroup your server will 
		appear to be in when queried by clients. Note that this parameter 
		also controls the Domain name used with the <A
HREF="#SECURITYEQUALSDOMAIN"
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>security = domain</B
></A
>
		setting.</P
><P
>Default: <EM
>set at compile time to WORKGROUP</EM
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>workgroup = MYGROUP</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="WRITABLE"
></A
>writable (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>Synonym for <A
HREF="#WRITEABLE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		writeable</I
></TT
></A
> for people who can't spell :-).</P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="WRITECACHESIZE"
></A
>write cache size (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>If this integer parameter is set to non-zero value,
		Samba will create an in-memory cache for each oplocked file 
		(it does <EM
>not</EM
> do this for 
		non-oplocked files). All writes that the client does not request 
		to be flushed directly to disk will be stored in this cache if possible. 
		The cache is flushed onto disk when a write comes in whose offset 
		would not fit into the cache or when the file is closed by the client. 
		Reads for the file are also served from this cache if the data is stored 
		within it.</P
><P
>This cache allows Samba to batch client writes into a more 
		efficient write size for RAID disks (i.e. writes may be tuned to 
		be the RAID stripe size) and can improve performance on systems 
		where the disk subsystem is a bottleneck but there is free 
		memory for userspace programs.</P
><P
>The integer parameter specifies the size of this cache 
		(per oplocked file) in bytes.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>write cache size = 0</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>write cache size = 262144</B
></P
><P
>for a 256k cache size per file.</P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="WRITELIST"
></A
>write list (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This is a list of users that are given read-write 
		access to a service. If the connecting user is in this list then 
		they will be given write access, no matter what the <A
HREF="#READONLY"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>read only</I
></TT
></A
>
		option is set to. The list can include group names using the 
		@group syntax.</P
><P
>Note that if a user is in both the read list and the 
		write list then they will be given write access.</P
><P
>See also the <A
HREF="#READLIST"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>read list
		</I
></TT
></A
> option.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>write list = &#60;empty string&#62;
		</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>write list = admin, root, @staff
		</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="WRITEOK"
></A
>write ok (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>Inverted synonym for <A
HREF="#READONLY"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		read only</I
></TT
></A
>.</P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="WRITERAW"
></A
>write raw (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter controls whether or not the server 
		will support raw write SMB's when transferring data from clients. 
		You should never need to change this parameter.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>write raw = yes</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
NAME="WRITEABLE"
></A
>writeable (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>Inverted synonym for <A
HREF="#READONLY"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>		read only</I
></TT
></A
>.</P
></DD
></DL
></DIV
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="REFSECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN6251"
></A
><H2
>WARNINGS</H2
><P
>Although the configuration file permits service names 
	to contain spaces, your client software may not. Spaces will 
	be ignored in comparisons anyway, so it shouldn't be a 
	problem - but be aware of the possibility.</P
><P
>On a similar note, many clients - especially DOS clients - 
	limit service names to eight characters. <A
HREF="smbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>smbd(8)
	</A
> has no such limitation, but attempts to connect from such 
	clients will fail if they truncate the service names.  For this reason 
	you should probably keep your service names down to eight characters 
	in length.</P
><P
>Use of the [homes] and [printers] special sections make life 
	for an administrator easy, but the various combinations of default 
	attributes can be tricky. Take extreme care when designing these 
	sections. In particular, ensure that the permissions on spool 
	directories are correct.</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="REFSECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN6257"
></A
><H2
>VERSION</H2
><P
>This man page is correct for version 2.2 of 
	the Samba suite.</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="REFSECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN6260"
></A
><H2
>SEE ALSO</H2
><P
><A
HREF="samba.7.html"
TARGET="_top"
>samba(7)</A
>,
	<A
HREF="smbpasswd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbpasswd(8)</B
></A
>,
	<A
HREF="swat.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>swat(8)</B
></A
>,
	<A
HREF="smbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbd(8)</B
></A
>, 
	<A
HREF="nmbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>nmbd(8)</B
></A
>, 
	<A
HREF="smbclient.1.html"
TARGET="_top"
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbclient(1)</B
></A
>, 
	<A
HREF="nmblookup.1.html"
TARGET="_top"
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>nmblookup(1)</B
></A
>,
	<A
HREF="testparm.1.html"
TARGET="_top"
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>testparm(1)</B
></A
>, 
	<A
HREF="testprns.1.html"
TARGET="_top"
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>testprns(1)</B
></A
>
	</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="REFSECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN6280"
></A
><H2
>AUTHOR</H2
><P
>The original Samba software and related utilities 
	were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed
	by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar 
	to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</P
><P
>The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. 
	The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another 
	excellent piece of Open Source software, available at
	<A
HREF="ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/"
TARGET="_top"
>	ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/</A
>) and updated for the Samba 2.0 
	release by Jeremy Allison.  The conversion to DocBook for 
	Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald Carter</P
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>